ford mondeo manual en
TRANSCRIPT
Feel the differenceFordMondeoOwner's handbook
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofdevelopment the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment at any time withoutnotice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof, may not be reproducednor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2010
All rights reserved.
Part number: (CG3536en) 11/2010 20101208144050
E108837
IntroductionAbout this handbook................................7Symbols glossary.......................................7Parts and accessories..............................7
Quick startQuick start..................................................11
Child safetyChild seats................................................22Booster cushions....................................23Child seat positioning.............................24ISOFIX anchor points..............................26Child safety locks....................................27
Occupant protectionPrinciple of operation..............................29Fastening the seat belts.........................31Seat belt height adjustment...................31Seat belt reminder..................................32Using seat belts during pregnancy......32Disabling the passenger airbag............32
Keys and remote controlsGeneral information on radiofrequencies..........................................34
Programming the remote control........34Changing the remote controlbattery...................................................34
LocksLocking and unlocking...........................37Global opening and closing...................39Keyless entry............................................41
Engine immobiliserPrinciple of operation..............................44Coded keys.............................................44Arming the engine immobiliser.............44Disarming the engine immobiliser........44
AlarmPrinciple of operation..............................45Arming the alarm.....................................47Disarming the alarm................................47
SteeringwheelAdjusting the steering wheel.................48Audio control...........................................48
Wipers andwashersWindscreen wipers.................................50Autowipers...............................................50Windscreen washers..............................51Rear window wiper and washers.........51Headlamp washers................................52Checking the wiper blades...................52Changing the wiper blades...................52
LightingLighting control........................................54Daytime running lamps (DRL)...............55Autolamps................................................55Automatic main beam control..............55Front fog lamps.......................................57Rear fog lamps........................................57Adjusting the headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps...........................................57
Headlamp levelling..................................57Adaptive front lighting system(AFS)......................................................58
Hazard warning flashers........................60Direction indicators.................................60Interior lamps...........................................60Removing a headlamp............................61Changing a bulb......................................63Bulb specification chart..........................69
Windows andmirrorsElectric windows......................................71
1
Table of contents
Exterior mirrors........................................73Electric exterior mirrors..........................73Auto-dimming mirror..............................75Blind spot monitor...................................75
InstrumentsGauges.....................................................78Warning lamps and indicators..............80Audible warnings and indicators..........82
Information displaysGeneral information................................84Trip computer..........................................93Personalised settings.............................95Information messages...........................97
Climate controlPrinciple of operation............................107Air vents...................................................107Manual climate control.........................108Automatic climate control.....................110Heated windows and mirrors...............113Auxiliary heater.......................................113Electric sunroof.......................................118
SeatsSitting in the correct position................121Manual seats...........................................121Electric seats..........................................122Head restraints......................................124Rear seats..............................................124Heated seats..........................................125Ventilated seats.....................................126
Convenience featuresSun blinds................................................127Instrument lighting dimmer..................127Clock........................................................127Cigar lighter.............................................127
Ashtray....................................................128Auxiliary power sockets.......................128Cup holders............................................129Glove box...............................................129Storage compartments........................129Map pockets..........................................130Memory function...................................130Glasses holder........................................131CD changer.............................................131Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket............132USB port.................................................132Floor mats...............................................132
Starting the engineGeneral information..............................133Ignition switch........................................133Keyless starting.....................................133Steering wheel lock...............................135Starting a petrol engine........................136Starting a petrol engine - E85..............137Starting a diesel engine........................137Diesel particulate filter (DPF)................138Switching off the engine.......................138Engine heater.........................................138
Start-stopPrinciple of operation............................140Using start-stop.....................................140
EcomodePrinciple of operation............................142Using Eco mode....................................142
Fuel and refuellingFuel quality - Petrol................................143Fuel quality - E85...................................143Fuel quality - Diesel...............................143Catalytic converter................................144Fuel filler flap...........................................144
2
Table of contents
Refuelling................................................145Refuelling - E85......................................145Fuel consumption..................................145Technical specifications........................145
TransmissionManual transmission.............................150Automatic transmission........................150
BrakesPrinciple of operation............................153Hints on driving with ABS.....................153Parking brake.........................................153
Stability controlPrinciple of operation............................154Using stability control............................154
Hill start assistPrinciple of operation............................156Using hill start assist..............................156
Active suspensionPrinciple of operation............................159Using active suspension......................159
Parking aidPrinciple of operation............................160Using the parking aid............................160
Rear viewcameraPrinciple of operation............................162Using the rear view camera.................162
Cruise controlPrinciple of operation............................165Using cruise control..............................165
Adaptive cruise control(ACC)
Principle of operation............................167Using ACC..............................................168Forward alert function...........................172
Speed limiterPrinciple of operation............................173Using the speed limiter.........................173
Driver alertPrinciple of operation............................175Using driver alert....................................175
Lane departurewarningPrinciple of operation............................177Using lane departure warning..............177
Load carryingGeneral information...............................179Luggage anchor points........................179Sliding loadspace floor..........................180Rear under floor storage......................182Luggage covers....................................182Cargo nets..............................................183Roof racks and load carriers...............184Dog guard...............................................184Load retaining fixtures..........................186
TowingTowing a trailer.......................................188Detachable tow ball..............................188
Driving hintsRunning-in..............................................192General driving points - Vehicles With:Sports Suspension............................192
Cold weather precautions...................192Driving through water...........................192
3
Table of contents
Emergency equipmentFirst aid kit...............................................193Warning triangle.....................................193
FusesFuse box locations................................194Changing a fuse....................................195Fuse specification chart.......................196
Vehicle recoveryTowing points........................................207Towing the vehicle on four wheels.....207
MaintenanceGeneral information..............................209Opening and closing the bonnet........210Engine compartment overview - 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma).............211
Engine compartment overview - 1.6LEcoBoost SCTi (Sigma).....................212
Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4)...............................213
Engine compartment overview - 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4).........................214
Engine compartment overview - 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)...............................215
Engine compartment overview - 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...............216
Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..............217
Engine compartment overview - 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..............219
Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)...................................220
Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma)................................................220
Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)..........220
Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)....................................................220
Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel...................................................221
Engine oil check.....................................221Engine coolant check...........................221Brake and clutch fluid check..............222Power steering fluid check.................222Washer fluid check...............................223Technical specifications.......................223
Vehicle careCleaning the exterior............................226Cleaning the interior.............................226Repairing minor paint damage...........227
Vehicle batteryUsing booster cables...........................228Changing the vehicle battery.............228Battery connection points...................229
Wheels and tyresGeneral information..............................230Changing a road wheel.......................230Tyre repair kit.........................................235Tyre care................................................238Using winter tyres.................................239Using snow chains...............................239Tyre pressure monitoring system......239Technical specifications.......................240
Vehicle identificationVehicle identification plate...................244Vehicle identification number (VIN).....244
Technical specificationsTechnical specifications.......................245
TelephoneGeneral information..............................250
4
Table of contents
Telephone setup...................................250Bluetooth setup.....................................251Telephone controls..............................252Using the telephone - VehiclesWithout:Navigation System............................252
Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System............................255
Voice controlPrinciple of operation...........................257Using voice control...............................257Audio unit commands.........................258Telephone commands.........................267Navigation system commands..........272Climate control commands................272
ConnectivityGeneral information..............................275Connecting an external device..........276Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth..................276
Using a USB device..............................277Using an iPod.........................................279
Navigation introductionRoad Safety...........................................283
Navigation systemGetting started......................................284
AppendicesType approvals......................................286Type approvals......................................286Electromagnetic compatibility............287
5
Table of contents
6
ABOUT THISHANDBOOK
Thank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thishandbook. Themore that you knowaboutit, the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.
WARNING
Always drive with due care andattentionwhen using and operatingthe controls and features on your
vehicle.
Note: This handbook describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range, sometimes even before theyare generally available. It may describeoptions not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in thishandbook may be used for differentmodels, so may appear different to yourvehicle. However, the essentialinformation in the illustrations is alwayscorrect.
Note: Always use and operate yourvehicle in line with all applicable laws andregulations.
Note: Pass on this handbook whenselling your vehicle. It is an integral part ofthe vehicle.
This vehicle has received theendorsement of TÜV, the accreditedinternational testing organisation, for itsallergy-friendly properties.
All materials used in the manufacture ofthe interior of this vehicle meet strictrequirements of the TÜV TOXPROOFCriteria Catalogue for Vehicle Interiors byTÜV Produkt and Umwelt GmbH and aredesigned to minimize the risk of allergicreactions.
Additionally an efficient pollen filterprotects the passengers against allergenparticles in the outdoor air.
For more information, contact TÜV atwww.tuv.com.
SYMBOLSGLOSSARY
Symbols in this handbook
WARNING
You risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do notfollow the instructions highlighted
by the warning symbol.
CAUTION
You risk damaging your vehicle if youdo not follow the instructionshighlighted by the caution symbol.
Symbols on your vehicle
When you see these symbols, read andfollow the relevant instructions in thishandbook before touching or attemptingadjustment of any kind.
PARTSANDACCESSORIES
Nowyou can be sure that yourFord parts are Ford parts
Your Ford has been built to the higheststandards using high quality Ford OriginalParts. As a result, you can enjoy driving itfor many years.
7
Introduction
Should the unexpectedoccur and amajorpart needs replacing,we recommend thatyou accept nothing less than FordOriginalParts.
The use of Ford Original Parts ensuresthat your vehicle is repaired to itspre-accident condition and maintains itsmaximum residual value.
FordOriginal Partsmatch Ford's stringentsafety requirements and high standardsof fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply, theyrepresent the best overall repair value,including parts and labour costs.
Now it is easier to tell if you have reallybeen given Ford Original Parts. The Fordlogo is clearly visible on the following partsif they are Ford Original Parts. If yourvehicle has to be repaired, look for theclearly visible Ford branding and makesure that only Ford Original Parts havebeen used.
Look for the Ford logo on thefollowing parts
Sheetmetal
• Bonnet
• Doors
• Luggage compartment lid or tailgate
• Wing
E131722
Bumper and radiator grille
• Radiator grille
• Front and rear bumper
8
Introduction
E131723
Exteriormirror
E131724
Glass
• Rear window
• Side glass
• Windscreen
E88507
9
Introduction
Lighting
• Rear lamps
• Headlamp
E131725
10
Introduction
QUICKSTART
Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive
E87719
A J K L M NC DB H IGFE
P OV U T S R Q
11
Quick start
Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive
E87720
ED F G B AML H CI
O QU T S R VP
KJ N
Lighting controls. See Lighting control (page 54).A
Air vents. See Air vents (page 107).B
Direction indicators. SeeDirectionindicators (page60). Telephone controlbuttons. See Telephonecontrols (page 252). Voice control buttons. SeeUsingvoicecontrol (page 257). Lane departure warning control buttons.See Lane departurewarning (page 177).
C
Audio controls. See Audio control (page 48).D
Instrument cluster. SeeGauges (page 78).E
Information display controls. See Information displays (page 84).F
Wiper lever. SeeWindscreenwipers (page 50).G
Start button. See Keyless starting (page 133).H
Audio or navigation unit. See separate handbook.I
12
Quick start
Stability control (ESP) switch. See Using stability control (page 154).Start-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 140).
J
Parking aid switch. See Using the parking aid (page 160).K
Hazard warning flasher switch. SeeHazardwarning flashers (page 60).L
Passenger airbagdeactivationwarning lamp. SeeDisablingthepassengerairbag (page 32).
M
Heated windscreen and heated rear window switches. See Heatedwindows andmirrors (page 113).
N
Climate controls. SeeManualclimatecontrol (page 108). SeeAutomaticclimate control (page 110).
O
Cigar lighter. See Cigar lighter (page 127).P
Ignition switch. See Ignition switch (page 133).Q
Cruise control and speed limiter switches. SeeUsingcruisecontrol (page165). Adaptive cruise control switches. SeeUsingACC (page 168). Speedlimiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 173).
R
Steeringwheel adjustment lever. SeeAdjustingthesteeringwheel (page48).
S
Horn.T
Cruise control and speed limiter switches. SeeUsingcruisecontrol (page165). Adaptive cruise control switches. SeeUsingACC (page 168). Speedlimiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 173).
U
Driver knee airbag. See Principle of operation (page 29).V
13
Quick start
Electric child safety locks
E124779
See Child safety locks (page 27).
Keyless entry
E78276
Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be locatedwithin oneof the three external detection ranges.
Unlocking the vehicle
E78278
Pull a door handle to unlock all the doorsand the luggage compartment lid anddisarm the alarm.
Locking the vehicle
E87384
E87435
14
Quick start
See Keyless entry (page 41).
Adjusting the steeringwheel
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.
1
2
2
E95178
3E95179
See Adjusting the steeringwheel(page 48).
Autowipers
E70315
BA
C
High sensitivityA
OnB
Low sensitivityC
Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control.
See Autowipers (page 50).
Changing thewiper blades
CAUTION
You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access tothe wiper blades for freeing them
from snow and ice. The windscreenwipers will return to their normal positionas soon as you switch on the ignition somake sure that the outside of thewindscreen is free from snow and icebefore you switch on the ignition.
15
Quick start
E85833
A
E75188
Switch off the ignition andmove thewiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the serviceposition.
See Changing thewiper blades(page 52).
Autolamps
E70719
The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.
See Lighting control (page 54).
Automaticmain beamcontrol
WARNING
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual
override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.
The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and noother traffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.
SeeAutomaticmainbeamcontrol(page 55).
Electricwindows
Note: To reduce wind noise or buffetingwhen just one window is open, open theopposite window slightly.
16
Quick start
See Electricwindows (page 71).
Electric foldingmirrors
E72623
SeeElectricexteriormirrors (page73).
Reversemirror dipping
Depending on the selected mirrorposition, the relevant exterior mirror willdip whenever you select reverse gear,giving you a view of the kerb.
When you first use this feature, themirrorswill dip to a preset position. You canprogramme the degree of dipping.
SeeElectricexteriormirrors (page73).
Blind spot information system(BLIS)
WARNING
Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.
The system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.
E124736
See Blind spotmonitor (page 75).
Information displays
E70499
17
Quick start
Use the arrow buttons to navigatethrough the menus and pressOK tomake a selection.
See Informationdisplays (page 84).
Manual climate control
Cooling the interior quickly
E71381
Heating the interior quickly
E71377
Recommendedsettingsforcooling
E131534
Open the centre and side air vents.
Direct the centre air vents upwards andthe side air vents toward the sidewindows.
Recommendedsettingsforheating
E131535
Close the centre air vents and open theside air vents.
Direct the side air vents toward the sidewindows.
Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen
E71382
SeeManual climate control (page108).
Automatic climate control
E91391
See Automatic climate control(page 110).
18
Quick start
Engineidlespeedafterstarting
The engine may idle at a higher speedthan normal immediately after startingfrom cold.
See Starting the engine (page 133).
Keyless starting
E85766
Press the start button.
Stopping the enginewhen thevehicle ismoving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering
assistance. The steering will not belocked, but higher effort will be required.When the ignition is switched off someelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators may also be OFF.
Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three timeswithin threeseconds.
See Keyless starting (page 133).
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF
regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and theexhaust will radiate a considerableamount of heat during and after DPFregeneration, andafter youhave switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.
See Diesel particulate filter (DPF)(page 138).
Fuel filler flap
E86613
Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.
E119080
19
Quick start
Insert the fuel nozzle up to and includingthe first notch on the nozzle. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel pipeopening.
WARNING
We recommend that you wait atleast 10 seconds before removingthe fuel nozzle to allow any residual
fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
E119081
Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.
See Fuel filler flap (page 144).
Manual transmission
Selecting reverse gear
E99067
On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.
SeeManualtransmission (page 150).
Automatic transmission
Note:Donot press thebrakepedalwhenremoving the key from the ignition switch.
Selector lever positions
WARNING
Apply the brakes beforemoving theselector lever and keep themapplied until you are ready to move
off.
E80836
S
ParkP
ReverseR
NeutralN
DriveD
Manual shifting and sportmodeS
SeeAutomatic transmission (page150).
Rear viewcamera
WARNING
The camera does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
20
Quick start
The camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.
E99105
See Rear viewcamera (page 162).
Speed limiter
The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.
See Speed limiter (page 173).
Driver alert
WARNING
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
The systemcalculates an alertness scorewhich canbedisplayedon the informationdisplay. If the systemdetects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is deteriorationin your driving style then warnings will beissued.
See Driver alert (page 175).
Lane departurewarning
WARNING
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
Activate the system using the switcheson the indicator stalk.
E131360
A
B
System onA
System offB
SeeLanedeparturewarning (page177).
Towing the vehicle on fourwheels
CAUTION
For certain engine and transmissioncombinations, it is recommendednotto tow the vehicle with the drive
wheels on the ground.
See Towing the vehicle on fourwheels (page 207).
21
Quick start
CHILDSEATS
E133140
E68916
WARNINGSSecure children that are less than150 centimetres tall in a suitable,government approved child
restraint, in the rear seat
Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an air bag in front
of it!
Read and follow themanufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting achild restraint.
Do not modify child restraints in anyway.
Do not hold a child on your lapwhenthe vehicle is moving.
WARNINGSDo not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.
If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the child restraintschecked by properly trained
technicians.
Note:Mandatory use of child restraintsvaries from country to country.
Only child restraints certified toECE-R44.03 (or later) have been testedand approved for use in your vehicle. Achoice of these are available from yourDealer.
Child restraints for differentmass groups
Use the correct child restraint as follows:
Baby safety seat
E68918
Secure children that weigh less than 13kilograms in a rearward facing baby safetyseat (Group 0+) in the rear seat.
22
Child safety
Child safety seat
E68920
Secure children that weigh between 13and 18 kilograms in a child safety seat(Group 1) in the rear seat
BOOSTERCUSHIONS
WARNINGSDo not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lapstrap of the seat belt.
Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushionwith a seat belt thatis slack or twisted.
Do not put the seat belt under yourchild’s arm or behind its back.
Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.
Make sure that your children sit inan upright position.
Secure children that weigh morethan 15 kilograms but are less than150 centimetres tall in a booster
seat or a booster cushion.
CAUTION
When using a child seat on a rearseat, make sure that the child seatrests tightly against the vehicle seat.
It may be necessary to lift or remove thehead restraint. See Head restraints(page 124).
Booster seat (Group2)
E70710
We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushiononly. The raised seating position will allowyou to position the shoulder strap of theadult seat belt over the centre of yourchild’s shoulder and the lap strap tightlyacross its hips.
23
Child safety
Booster cushion (Group3)
E68924
CHILDSEATPOSITIONING
WARNINGSPlease consult your Dealer for thelatest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.
WARNINGSOriginal text according to ECER94.01: ExtremeHazard!Donot usea rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in front ofit!
When using a child restraint with asupport leg on a second row seat,make sure the support leg rests
securely on the floor.
When using a forward facing childseat on a second row seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that
seat. SeeHeadrestraints (page 124).
When using a child seat with a seatbelt, make sure that the seat belt isnot slack or twisted.
Note:When using a child seat on a frontseat, always adjust the front passengerseat to its fully rearwards position. If itproves difficult to tighten the lap sectionof the seat belt without slack remaining,adjust the seatback to the fully uprightposition and raise the height of the seat.See Seats (page 121).
Mass group categories
Seating positions 3210+0
22 - 36 kg15 - 25 kg9 - 18 kgUp to 13kg
Up to 10kg
UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbagON
U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹Front passenger seatwith airbagOFF
UUUUURear seats
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.
U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.
24
Child safety
U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved childseat, in the rear seat.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in thismass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a governmentapproved child seat, in the rear seat.
ISOFIX child seats
Mass group categories
Seating positions10+
Forward facingRear facing
9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg
Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat
Seat type
A, B, B1, C, D*C, D, E*Size classRear outboard seat ISOFIX
IL, IUF***IL**Seat type
Not ISOFIX equippedSize classRear centre seat
Seat type
ILSuitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systemsof thesemi-universal category.Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.
IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal categoryapproved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.*The ISOFIX size class for bothuniversal andsemi-universal child restraints systemsis defined by the capital letters A toG. These identification letters are displayed onISOFIX child restraints.**At time of publishing the recommendedGroupO+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the BritaxRomer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.***At time of publishing the recommendedGroup 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax RomerDuo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommendedchild seats.
25
Child safety
ISOFIX ANCHORPOINTS
WARNING
Use an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether
or support leg.
Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchorpoints that accommodate universallyapproved ISOFIX child restraints.
The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child restraintthat attach to anchor points on theoutboard rear seats, where the cushionand backrest meet. Tether anchor pointsare fitted behind the outboard rear seatsfor child restraints with a top tether.
Top tether anchor points
E87146
E93616
E93514
Attaching a child seatwith toptethers
WARNING
Do not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.
Note:Where applicable, remove theluggage cover to ease installation. SeeLuggage covers (page 182).Note:On4-door vehicles,make sure thetether strap tightening mechanismremains accessible when the seatback isfully engaged.
26
Child safety
E87591
1. Place the child seat on the back seatcushion and fold the relevant seatbackforwards. SeeRearseats (page124).
2. Remove the head restraint. SeeHead restraints (page 124).
WARNING
Make sure the top tether strap is notslack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.
3. Route the tether strap to the anchorpoint.
WARNING
Make sure that the seatback issecure and fully engaged in thecatch.
4. Push the seatback to the uprightposition.
E87145
5. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchorpoints.
6. Tighten the tether strap in linewith thechild seatmanufacturer's instructions.
CHILDSAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
You cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.
Manual child safety locks
Note:On vehicleswith keyless entry, usethe spare key. SeeKeylessentry (page41).
27
Child safety
E78298
Left-hand side
Turn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwiseto unlock.
Right-hand side
Turn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwiseto unlock.
Electric child safety locks
Note:Pressing the switchwill also disablethe rear electric window switches.
E124779
28
Child safety
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
Airbags
WARNINGSDo not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the
airbags.
Original text according to ECER94.01: ExtremeHazard!Donot usea rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front ofit!
Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use
the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition that allows the airbag to achieveits optimum effect. See Sitting in thecorrect position (page 121).
Have repairs to the steering wheel,steering column, seats, airbags andseat belts carried out by a properly
trained technician.
Keep the areas in front of theairbags free from obstruction. Donot affix anything to or over the
airbag covers.
Do not poke sharp objects intoareas where airbags are fitted. Thiscould damage and adversely affect
deployment of the airbags.
Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby a properly trained technician.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and seea cloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.
Note: Only wipe airbag covers with adamp cloth.
Driverandfrontpassengerairbags
E74302
The driver and front passenger airbagswill deploy during significant frontalcollisions or collisions that are up to 30degrees from the left or the right. Theairbags will inflate within a fewthousandths of a second and deflate oncontact with the occupants, thuscushioning forward body movement.During minor frontal collisions, overturns,rear collisions and side collisions, the driverand front passenger airbags will notdeploy.
Driver knee airbag
CAUTION
Do not attempt to open the driverknee airbag cover.
The driver knee airbag will deploy duringfrontal collisions or collisions that are upto 30 degrees from the left or the right.The airbag will inflate within a fewthousandths of a second and deflate oncontact with the occupants, thusproviding a cushion between the driver’sknees and the steering column. Duringoverturns, rear collisions and sidecollisions, the knee airbag will not deploy.
For item location: SeeQuickstart (page11).
29
Occupant protection
Note: The knee airbag has a lowerdeployment threshold than the frontairbags. During a minor collision, it ispossible that only the knee airbagdeploys.
Side airbags
E72658
Side airbags are fitted inside the seatbackof the front seats. A label indicates thatside airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
The side airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbagswill inflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe chest and shoulder areas. Duringminor lateral collisions, overturns, frontcollisions and rear collisions, the sideairbags will not deploy.
Curtain airbags
E75004
Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trimpanels over the front and rear sidewindows. Moulded badges in the B-pillartrim panels indicate that curtain airbagsare fitted to your vehicle.
The curtain airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbag willinflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe head. During minor lateral collisions,front collisions, rear collisions, or overturnsthe curtain airbags will not deploy.
Seat belts
WARNINGSWear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use
the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect.See Sitting in the correct position(page 121).
Never use a seat belt for more thanone person.
Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.
Do not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.
Do notwear thick clothing. The seatbeltmust fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.
Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the centre of yourshoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
30
Occupant protection
The driver and front passenger seat beltretractors are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensionershave a lower deployment threshold thanthe airbags. During minor collisions, it ispossible that only the seat beltpretensioners will deploy.
Status after a collision
WARNING
Seat belts subjected to strain, as aresult of an accident, should berenewed and the anchorages
checked by a properly trained technician.
FASTENINGTHESEATBELTS
WARNING
Insert the tongue into the buckleuntil you hear a distinct click. Youhave not fastened the seat belt
properly if you do not hear a click.
E74124
E85817
Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.
Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Let it retract completelyand smoothly.
SEATBELTHEIGHTADJUSTMENT
E87511
Note: Lifting the slider slightly whilepressing the locking button makes iteasier to release the locking mechanism.
To raise or lower, press the locking buttonon the adjuster and move as necessary.
31
Occupant protection
SEATBELTREMINDER
WARNING
Theoccupant protection systemwillonly provide optimum protectionwhen you use the seat belt properly.
The seat belt reminder warninglamp illuminates and an audiblewarning will sound if the driver's
or front seat passenger's seat belt hasnot been fastened and the vehicleexceeds a relatively low speed. It will alsoilluminate if the driver's or front seatpassenger's seat belt is unfastenedwhenthe vehicle ismoving. The audiblewarningand warning lamp will go off after sevenminutes.
Deactivating the seat beltreminder
See your dealer.
USINGSEATBELTSDURINGPREGNANCY
E68587
WARNING
Position the seat belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unbornchild. Do not use only the lap strap
or the shoulder strap.
Position the lap strap comfortably acrossyour hips and low beneath your pregnantabdomen. Position the shoulder strapbetween your breasts, above and to theside of your pregnant abdomen.
DISABLINGTHEPASSENGERAIRBAG
WARNING
Make sure that the passengerairbag is disabled when using arearward facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat.
E71313
Fitting the passenger airbagdeactivation switch
WARNING
If you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a
passenger airbag deactivation switchfitted. Ask your dealer for furtherinformation.
Note: The key switch is located in theglove compartment with an airbagdeactivation lamp in the instrument panel.
32
Occupant protection
If the airbag warning lamp illuminates orflasheswhen you are driving, this indicatesamalfunction. SeeWarninglampsandindicators (page 80). Remove the childrestraint and have the system checkedimmediately.
Disablingthepassengerairbag
A BE71312
DisabledA
EnabledB
Turn the switch to position A.
When you switch the ignition on, checkthat the passenger airbag deactivationwarning lamp illuminates.
Enabling thepassengerairbag
WARNING
Make sure that the passengerairbag is enabledwhen you arenotusing a child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
Turn the switch to position B.
33
Occupant protection
GENERALINFORMATIONONRADIO FREQUENCIES
CAUTIONSThe radio frequency used by yourremote control can also be used byother short distance radio
transmissions (e.g. amateur radios,medical equipment,wirelessheadphones,remote controls and alarm systems). Ifthe frequencies are jammed, you will notbe able to use your remote control. Youcan lock and unlock the doors with thekey.
Check your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended. This willsafeguard against any potential
malicious frequency blocking.
Note: You could unlock the doors if youpress the buttons on the remote controlunintentionally.
The operating range between yourremote control and your vehicle variesdepending on the environment.
PROGRAMMINGTHEREMOTECONTROL
You can programme amaximumof eightremote controls to use with your vehicle(including any suppliedwith your vehicle).
Programming a new remotecontrol
1. Insert the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the key fromposition0 to II andthen back to 0 four times within sixseconds.
3. Leave the key in position 0 and pressany button on the remote controlwithin 10 seconds. You will receiveconfirmation via a chime or LED thatprogramming has been successful.
Note: Further remote controls may beprogrammed at this stage.
4. Press any button on each additionalremote control within 10 seconds ofeach other.
Reprogramming theunlockingfunction
Note:When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or onlythe driver’s door is unlocked. Pressing theunlock button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lockbuttons on the remote key simultaneouslyfor at least four seconds with the ignitionoff. The direction indicators will flash twiceto confirm the change.
To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.
CHANGINGTHEREMOTECONTROLBATTERY
E107998
Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.
34
Keys and remote controls
Remote control with a foldingkey blade
E1288092
1
1. Insert a screwdriver in the positionshown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.
E128810
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E128811
4. Turn the remote control over toremove the battery.
5. Install a newbattery (3VCR2032)withthe + facing upwards.
6. Replace the battery cover.
Remote control without afolding key blade
1
2
1
E87964
1. Press and hold the pushbuttons onthe edges to release the cover.Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.
E105362
3
3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in theposition shown to separate the twohalves of the remote control.
35
Keys and remote controls
E119190
4
4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in theposition shown to open the remotecontrol.
E125860
5
CAUTION
Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.
5. Carefully prise out the battery with thescrewdriver.
6. Install a newbattery (3VCR2032)withthe + facing downwards.
7. Assemble the two halves of theremote control.
8. Install the key blade.
36
Keys and remote controls
LOCKINGANDUNLOCKING
CAUTION
Check your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended.
Central locking
You can only centrally lock the doors ifthey are all closed.
Note: The driver’s door can be unlockedwith the key. This needs to be used if theremote control or keyless entry is notfunctioning.
Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap.
Double locking
WARNING
Donot activate double lockingwhenpersons or animals are inside thevehicle. You will not be able to
unlock the doors from the inside if youhave double locked them.
E71961
Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone fromopening thedoors from the inside. You can onlydouble lock the doors if they are all closed.
Locking and unlockingconfirmation
When you unlock the doors, the directionindicators will flash once.
When you lock the doors, the directionindicators will flash twice.
Locking and unlocking thedoorswith the key
B
E71962
A
B
A
UnlockA
LockB
Double locking the doorswiththe key
Turn the key to the lock position twicewithin three seconds to double lock thedoors.
37
Locks
Locking and unlocking thedoors and the luggagecompartment lidwith theremote control
E87379
A B C
UnlockA
LockB
Luggage compartment lidunlock (press twice)
C
Lockingthedoorsandthe luggagecompartment lidwith the remotecontrol
Press button B once.
Double locking the doors and theluggage compartment lidwith theremote control
Press button B twice within threeseconds.
Locking and unlocking thedoors from inside
Driver's door
A
B
E71958
Lock all doorsA
Unlock all doorsB
Front and rear passenger doors
E98653
To lock the front and rear passengerdoors individually, press the button andclose the door when leaving the vehicle.
38
Locks
Luggage compartment lid
Openingtheluggagecompartmentlidwith the remote control
Press button C on the remote controltwice within three seconds.
Closing the luggage compartmentlid
4-door
E89131
5-door
E89132
Estate
E89133
A recessed grip is incorporated inside theluggage compartment lid to facilitateclosing.
Automatic relocking
The doors will relock automatically if youdo not open a door within 45 seconds ofunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol. The door locks and the alarm willreturn to their previous state.
Reprogramming theunlockingfunction
The unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked. See Programmingthe remote control (page 34).
GLOBALOPENINGANDCLOSING
You can also operate the electricwindowswith the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function.
Note: Global closing will only operate ifyou have set the memory correctly foreach window. See Electricwindows(page 71).
39
Locks
Global opening
E71955
To open all the windows, press and holdthe unlock button for at least threeseconds. Press either the lock or theunlockbutton again to stop the openingfunction.
Global closing
Vehicleswithout keyless entry
WARNING
Take care when using globalclosing. In an emergency, press abutton immediately to stop.
E71956
To close all the windows, press and holdthe lock button for at least threeseconds. Press any button again to stopthe closing function. The anti-trap functionis also active during global closing.
Vehicleswith keyless entry
E87384
WARNING
Take care when using globalclosing. In an emergency, press thebutton on the driver’s door handle
to stop.
Note: Global closing can be activatedusing the button on the driver’s doorhandle. Global opening and closing canalso be activated using the buttons on thepassive key.
To close all the windows, press and holdthe button on the driver’s door handle forat least two seconds. The anti-trapfunction is also active during globalclosing.
40
Locks
KEYLESSENTRY
General information
WARNING
The keyless entry system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such
as mobile phones.
Note: If the door handles are pulledrepeatedly during a short period of timewithout the presence of a valid passivekey, the system will become inoperablefor 30 seconds.
The passive entry systemwill not functionif:• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.
Note: If the passive entry system doesnot function, you will need to use the keyblade to lock and unlock your vehicle.
The keyless system allows the driver tooperate the vehicle without the use of akey or remote control.
E78276
Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be locatedwithin oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately one anda half metres from the driver and frontpassenger door handles and the luggagecompartment lid.
Passive key
The vehicle can be locked and unlockedwith the passive key. The passive key canalso be used as a remote control. SeeLocking and unlocking (page 37).
Locking the vehicle
E87384
E87435
WARNING
The vehicle does not lock itselfautomatically. If no locking button ispressed, the vehicle will remain
unlocked.
41
Locks
Note: If locking from the luggagecompartment lid, the passive key mustbe within the luggage compartment liddetection range.
Locking buttons are located on each ofthe front doors and the luggagecompartment lid.
To activate central locking and arm thealarm:• Press a locking button once.
To activate double locking, to arm thealarm and the interior sensors:• Press a locking button twice within
three seconds.
Note: Once activated, the vehicle willremain locked for approximately threeseconds. This is to allow you to pull a doorhandle and check if the vehicle is locked.When the delay period is over, the doorscan be opened again, provided thepassive key is within the respectivedetection range.
Luggage compartment lid
Note: The luggage compartment lidcannot be closed and will pop back up ifthe passive key is located inside theluggage compartment.
Note: If a second valid passive key islocated within the luggage compartmentlid detection range, the luggagecompartment lid can be closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
Note: If the vehicle remains locked forlonger than five days, the systemwill enteran energy-savingmode. This is to reducethe discharge of the vehicle battery.Whenthe vehicle is unlockedwhile in thismode,the reaction time of the systemmay be alittle longer than normal. Unlocking thevehicle once will deactivate theenergy-saving mode.
E78278
Pull one of the door handles or theluggage compartment lid handle.
Note: A valid passive key must belocatedwithin the detection range of thatdoor.
One long flash of the direction indicatorsconfirms that all the doors, the luggagecompartment lid and the fuel filler flaphave been unlocked and that the alarmhas been disarmed.
Unlocking only the driver's door
If the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver’s door is unlocked( See Keys and remote controls(page 34). ), note the following:
If the driver’s door is the first door whichis opened, the other doors and theluggage compartment lid will remainlocked. All the other doors can beunlocked from inside the vehicle bypressing the unlock button next to thedriver’s door handle. Doors can beunlocked individually by pulling the interiordoor handles on those doors.
If the front passenger door or one of therear doors is the first door which isopened, all the doors and the luggagecompartment lid will be unlocked.
42
Locks
Disabled keys
Any keys left inside the vehicle interiorwhen it is locked will be disabled.
A disabled key cannot be used to turn theignition on or start the engine.
In order to use these passive keys again,they have to be enabled.
To enable all your passive keys, unlockthe vehicle using a passive key or theremote control unlocking function.
All passive keys will then be enabled if theignition is turned on or the vehicle isstarted using a valid key.
Locking and unlocking thedoorswith the key blade
1
2
1
E87964
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade and insert itinto the lock.
43
Locks
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The engine immobiliser is a theftprotection system that prevents someonefrom starting the engine with anincorrectly coded key.
CODEDKEYS
Note:Do not shield your keys withmetalobjects. This may prevent the receiverfrom recognising your key as a valid one.
Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Askyour dealer for further information. Havereplacement keys recoded togetherwithyour existing keys.
If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from your Ford Dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with theoriginal keys. You can also obtainadditional keys from your Ford Dealer.
ARMINGTHEENGINEIMMOBILISER
The engine immobiliser is armedautomatically a short time after you haveswitched the ignition off.
DISARMINGTHEENGINEIMMOBILISER
The engine immobiliser is disarmedautomaticallywhen you switch the ignitionon with a correctly coded key.
If the message Immobiliser activeappears in the information display, yourkey has not been recognised. Removethe key and try again.
If you are unable to start the engine witha correctly coded key, this indicates amalfunction. Themessage Immobiliseractive will appear in the informationdisplay when you switch on the ignition.Have the immobiliser checkedimmediately.
44
Engine immobiliser
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
Alarmsystem
Your vehicle may be equipped with oneof the following alarm systems:
• Perimeter alarm.
• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
• Category one alarm with interiorsensors andbattery back-up sounder.
• Category one alarm with interiorsensors, battery back-up sounder andtilt sensors.
Perimeter alarm
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorised access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the bonnet. It alsoprotects the audio unit.
Interior sensors
Vehicleswithoutoverheadconsole
E71401
Vehicleswith overhead console
E131656
WARNING
The sensors must not be coveredup. Do not activate the alarm withfull guard if any persons, animals or
other moving objects are inside thevehicle.
The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorised intrusion by sensing anymovement within the vehicle.
Battery back-up sounder
The battery back-up sounder is an extraalarm system which will sound a sirenwhen the alarm is triggered. It is armeddirectly when you lock the vehicle. Thesounder has its own battery and willsound an alarm siren even if someonedisconnects the vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.
Tilt sensors
The tilt sensors detect if someoneattempts to steal a wheel or tow thevehicle away by sensing changes in theinclination of the vehicle.
Note:When travelling on a ferry with thealarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensorsby selecting reduced guard. This willprevent the alarm from being triggeredby the movement.
Triggering the alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:
• If someone opens a door, the tailgateor the bonnet without a valid key orremote control.
• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.
• If the ignition is turned to position I, IIor III without a valid key.
• If the interior sensors detectmovement within the vehicle.
45
Alarm
• On vehicles with a battery back-upsounder, if someone disconnects thevehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.
• If the tilt sensors detect a change inthe inclination of the vehicle.
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm hornwillsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one ofthe above will trigger the alarm again.
Full and reduced guard
Full guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior and tilt sensorsare activated when you arm the alarm.
Note: This may result in false alarms ifanimals or moving objects are inside thevehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors,when travelling on a ferry.
Note: False alarms can also be triggeredby the auxiliary heater See Auxiliaryheater (page 113). If you are using theauxiliary heater, direct the air flow towardsthe footwell.
Reduced guard
In reduced guard, the interior and tiltsensors are deactivated when you armthe alarm.
Note: You can set the alarm to reducedguard for the current ignition cycle only.The next time you switch on the ignition,the alarm will be reset to full guard.
Ask on Exit
You can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.
If you select Ask on Exit, the messageReduced guard? appears in theinstrument cluster display each time youswitch the ignition off.
If you wish to arm the alarmwith reducedguard, press theOK button when thismessage appears.
If youwish to arm the alarmwith full guard,leave the vehiclewithout pressing theOKbutton.
Selecting full or reduced guard
Note: SelectingReduced does not setthe alarmpermanently to reduced guard.It sets it to reduced guard only for thecurrent ignition cycle. If you regularly setthe alarm to reduced guard, select Askon Exit.
E70499
E74509
Full Guard
Alarm
ReducedAsk on Exit
46
Alarm
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. Highlight Alarm and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Reduced or Full guard. Ifyou prefer to be asked each time youswitch off the ignition, select Ask onExit.
5. Press theOK button to confirm theselection.
6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.
Informationmessages
See Informationmessages (page97).
ARMINGTHEALARM
To arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. SeeLocks (page 37).
DISARMINGTHEALARM
Vehicleswithout keyless entry
Perimeter alarm
Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded key, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.
Category one alarm
Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.
Vehicleswith keyless entry
Note: A valid passive key must belocatedwithin the detection range of thatdoor for keyless entry. See Keylessentry (page 41).
Perimeter alarm
Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition on,or unlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.
Category one alarm
Disarmand silence the alarmby unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition onwithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.
47
Alarm
ADJUSTINGTHESTEERINGWHEEL
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.
Note:Make sure that you are sitting inthe correct position. See Sitting in thecorrect position (page 121).
1
2
2
E95178
3E95179
WARNING
Make sure that you fully engage thelocking lever when returning it to itsoriginal position.
AUDIOCONTROL
E72288
A
C
BD
E
Volume upA
Seek upB
Volume downC
Seek downD
ModeE
Mode
Press and hold the mode button toselect the audio source.
Press the mode button to:• tune the radio to the next preset
station• play the next CD
• play the other side of a cassette tape
• accept an incoming telephone call.
• end a telephone call.
48
Steeringwheel
Seek
Press a seek button to:• tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band• play the next or the previous CD track
• fast forward or rewind the cassettetape.
Press and hold a seek button to:• tune the radio up or down the
frequency band• seek through a CD track.
49
Steeringwheel
WINDSCREENWIPERS
B
C
D
AE70696
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittentwipe
E70315
BA
C
Short wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Long wipe intervalC
AUTOWIPERS
CAUTIONSDo not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may
operate if dirt, mist or flies hit thewindscreen.
Replace thewiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace
them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windscreen and thewipers will operate, even though themajority of the windscreen is dry.
Fully defrost the windscreen in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.
Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.
E70315
BA
C
High sensitivityA
OnB
Low sensitivityC
50
Wipers andwashers
If you switch autowipers on, the wiperswill not cycle until water is detected onthe windscreen. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount ofwater on the windscreen and adjust thespeed of the wipers automatically.
Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on thewindscreen. With high sensitivity, thewipers will operate if the sensor detectsa small amount of water on thewindscreen.
WINDSCREENWASHERS
WARNING
Do not operate the windscreenwashers for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.
Note: The washer jets are heated whenthe ignition is on.
E70776
REARWINDOWWIPERANDWASHERS
Intermittentwipe
E70777
Reverse gearwipe
The rear window wiper will operateautomatically when you select reversegear if the wiper lever is in position B, Cor D.
Washer
WARNING
Do not operate the rear windowwasher for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.
E70777
Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel and hold it to operate the washer.
51
Wipers andwashers
HEADLAMPWASHERS
The headlamp washers will operate withthe windscreen washers when theheadlamps are on.
Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoiremptying quickly, the headlamp washerswill not operate every time that you usethe windscreen washers.
CHECKINGTHEWIPERBLADES
E66644
Run the tip of your fingers over the edgeof the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blade lips with waterapplied with a soft sponge.
CHANGINGTHEWIPERBLADES
Windscreenwiper blades
CAUTIONSSet the windscreen wipers in theservice position to change the wiperblades.
CAUTIONSYou can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access tothe wiper blades for freeing them
from snow and ice. Make sure that theoutside of the windscreen is free fromsnow and ice before using the wipers.
Service position
E85833
A
E75188
Switch off the ignition andmove thewiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the serviceposition.
52
Wipers andwashers
Changing thewindscreenwiperblades
Set the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition and lift the wiper arms.
E728991
2
1. Press the locking button.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note:Make sure that the wiper bladelocks into place.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Rearwindowwiper blades
Changing the rearwindowwiperblades - Estate
1. Lift the wiper arm.
2
3
4
E86456
2. Position thewiper blade at right anglesto the wiper arm.
3. Disengage the wiper blade from thewiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note:Make sure that the wiper bladelocks into place.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Changing the rearwindowwiperblades - 5-door
1. Lift the wiper arm.
E864572
3
2. Press the locking button.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
Note:Make sure that the wiper bladelocks into place.
4. Install in the reverse order.
53
Wipers andwashers
LIGHTINGCONTROL
Lighting control positions
E70718
A B C
OffA
Side and tail lampsB
HeadlampsC
Parking lamps
CAUTION
Prolonged use of the parking lampswill discharge the battery.
Switch off the ignition.
Both sides
Set the lighting control to position B.
One side
E75505
A
B
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Main and dipped beam
E70725
Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel to switch between main anddipped beam.
Headlamp flasher
Pull the lever slightly towards the steeringwheel.
54
Lighting
Homesafe lighting
Switch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever towards thesteering wheel to switch the headlampson. You will hear a short tone. Theheadlamps will go off automatically afterthree minutes with any door open, or 30seconds after the last door has beenclosed.
With all doors closed, but within the 30second delay, opening any doorwill resultin the three minute timer starting again.
The home safe lights can be cancelled byeither pulling the direction indicator levertowards the steering wheel again or byturning the ignition switch on.
DAYTIMERUNNINGLAMPS(DRL)
The lampswill illuminatewhen the ignitionis on.
AUTOLAMPS
E70719
Note: If you have switched autolampson, you can only switch the main beamon when autolamps has switched theheadlamps on.
The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.
AUTOMATICMAINBEAMCONTROL
WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual
override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.
A manual override may be requiredwhen approaching other road userssuch as cyclists.
Do not use the system in fog.
CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weatherconditions the system may notfunction. A manual override may be
necessary in these cases.
Reflective road signs may bedetected as oncoming traffic and theheadlamps may be switched to
dipped beam.
If the lights of oncoming vehicles arehidden by obstacles (for exampleguard rails) the system may not
deactivate the main beam.
Always fit Ford Original Parts whenreplacing headlamp bulbs. Otherbulbs may reduce system
performance.
Check and replace wiper bladesregularly to ensure the camerasensor has a clear view through the
windscreen. Replacement wiper bladesmust be the correct length.
Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.
55
Lighting
The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and noother traffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.
A camera sensor is centrally mountedbehind thewindscreen of the vehicle, andmonitors conditions continuously todecidewhen to switch themain beamoffand on.
Once the system is active themain beamwill switch on if:• It is dark enough to require the use of
main beams and• there is no traffic or street lighting
ahead and• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h
(25 mph).
The main beam will switch off if:• The ambient light is high enough that
main beam is not required.• An approaching vehicle's headlamps
or tail lamps are detected.• Street lighting is detected.
• Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16mph).
• The camera sensor is too hot orbecomes blocked.
Activating the system
Switch on the system using theinformation display and autolamps. SeeInformation displays (page 84). SeeAutolamps (page 55).
E70719
Turn the switch to the autolamps position.
Note: The systemmay take a short timeto initialise after first switching the ignitionon, especially in very dark conditions. Themain beam will not automatically switchon during this period.
Setting the systemsensitivity
The system has three sensitivity levelswhich can be accessed via theinformation display. See Informationdisplays (page 84).
The sensitivity determines the speed atwhich themain beamwill be restored afterdetected traffic leaves the field of view.
Manuallyoverridingthesystem
E70725
Use the main beam lever to switchbetween main beam and dipped beam.
56
Lighting
Note: This is a temporary override andthe system will return to automaticoperation after a short period.
To permanently deactivate the systemuse the information display menu or turnthe lighting control switch fromautolampsto headlamps.
FRONT FOGLAMPS
E70721
WARNING
Only use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.
REARFOGLAMPS
E70720
WARNINGSOnly use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50metres.
WARNINGSDonot use the rear fog lampswhenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 metres.
ADJUSTINGTHEHEADLAMPS - VEHICLESWITH: ADAPTIVE FRONTLIGHTING/XENONHEADLAMPS
To adjust the headlamps for driving on theleft or right hand side of the road, see yourdealer.
HEADLAMPLEVELLING
Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlampsare equipped with automatic headlamplevelling.
E70722A B
Raised headlamp beamsA
Lowered headlamp beamsB
You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.
57
Lighting
Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions
Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment
Load
Second rowseatsFront seats
0--1-2
0 (0.52)--1-2
1 (0.52)-31-2
3 (0.52)Max131-2
4 (1.52)Max1-1
1 See Vehicle identification (page 244).2 Vehicles with active suspension.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTINGSYSTEM (AFS)
E72897
A
B
A
B
58
Lighting
without AFSA
with AFSB
The AFS adjusts the headlamp dippedbeamdepending on vehicle direction andspeed. It improves visibility when you aredriving at night and helps to reduceheadlamp glare for oncoming drivers.
The system will not operate when thevehicle is stationary, when you haveswitched on the daytime running lampsor when you have selected reverse gear.
A message will appear in the informationdisplay if the system malfunctions. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).The headlampswill move to a fixed centralor dipped position. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.
Cornering lamps
E72898
B
A
B
A
Headlamp beamA
Cornering lamp beamB
The cornering lamps illuminate the insideof a corner when you are turning.
59
Lighting
HAZARDWARNINGFLASHERS
E71943
For item location: SeeQuickstart (page11).
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E70727
Note: Tap the lever up or down to makethe direction indicators flash only threetimes.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Courtesy lamp
CBA
E71945
OffA
Door contactB
OnC
If you set the switch to position B, thecourtesy lamp will come on when youunlock or open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, the courtesylamp will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch it back on, switchon the ignition for a short time.
The courtesy lampwill also comeonwhenyou switch off the ignition. It will go offautomatically after a short time or whenyou start or restart the engine.
If you set the switch to positionCwith theignition switch off, the courtesy lamp willcome on. It will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch it back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.
60
Lighting
Reading lamps
E71946
If you switch off the ignition, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.
LED interior lighting
B
A
E131657
Individual lampon andoff switchA
Master on and off switchB
You can control all lamps using switchB.
Note: If all lamps have been switched onby the driver's control, they cannot beswitched off independently.
The lamps will come on when you unlockor open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, all lamps willgo off automatically after some time toprevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.
If you press and hold switch B for 3seconds all lamps will stay off regardlessof the doors or luggage compartment lidposition. Press the switch briefly again toreverse.
Vanitymirror lamps
A
B
E72900
OffA
OnB
If you switch off the ignition, the vanitymirror lampswill go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch them backon, switch on the ignition for a short time.
REMOVINGAHEADLAMP
WARNING
Have Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.
61
Lighting
1. Open thebonnet. SeeOpeningandclosing the bonnet (page 210).
E85995
2. Remove the screws.
E88843
3. Remove the plastic screw andretainer.
5
4E85996
4. Carefully pull the corner of the grilleand bumper towards the front of thevehicle.
5. Carefully lift the corner of theheadlamp and push it as far aspossible towards the back of thevehicle.
7
6
E88982
6. Carefully pull the headlamp towardsthe centre of the vehicle, behind thegrille and bumper, to disengage it fromthe lower outer fixing point.
7. Remove the headlamp.
62
Lighting
CAUTION
When fitting the headlamp, take carenot to damage the locating points.
Note:When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you fully engage the headlampin the lower outer fixing point.
Note:When fitting the headlamp, tightenthe front screw first and then the rearscrew.
CHANGINGABULB
WARNINGSSwitch the lights and the ignition off.
Let the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.
Have Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.
CAUTIONSDo not touch the glass of the bulb.
Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification. See Bulbspecification chart (page 69).
Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fitreplacements in the reverse order unlessotherwise stated.
Headlamp
Note:Remove the covers to gain accessto the bulbs.
Direction indicator
1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemoving a headlamp (page 61).
E72259
2
3
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.
3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.
Headlampmain beam
1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemoving a headlamp (page 61).
E72261
3
2
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.
63
Lighting
Headlampdipped beam
1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemoving a headlamp (page 61).
E72260
3
2
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
Cornering lamp
1. Remove the headlamp. SeeRemoving a headlamp (page 61).
E72262
3
2
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.
Daytime running lamps
Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.
E131653
Side repeater
E72263
1. Carefully remove the side repeater.
E72291
64
Lighting
2. Remove the bulb holder.
3. Remove the bulb.
Approach lamp
Note: Position the mirror glass as farinwards as possible.
E72264
1
1. Insert a screwdriver into the gapbetween the mirror housing and themirror glass and release the metalretaining clip.
E72265
2
3
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.
Front fog lamps
E72267
3
2
4
1
Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.
Note: Do not remove the screws.
1. Loosen the screws.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.
65
Lighting
Rear lamps
Direction indicator
E86003
1
1. Remove the trim panel.
E131687
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.
3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise and removeit.
Tail and brake lamp
Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.
Reversing lampand fog lamp
1
E86006
1. Remove the trim panel.
E131688
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.
3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise and removeit.
Central highmounted brakelamp
Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.
66
Lighting
Number plate lamp
E72789
3
2
1
1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.
Interior lamps
Vehicleswith LED lamps
Note: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.
E131655
Vehicleswithout interior sensors
3
2
E72788
1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
Vehicleswith interior sensors
E72787
2
3
1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
67
Lighting
Reading lamps
Vehicleswithout interior sensors
E72796
33
2
1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
Vehicleswith interior sensors
E72786
22
1
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.
E739393
3. Remove the bulb.
Vanitymirror lamp
E72785
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.
68
Lighting
Luggage compartment lamp
E72784
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.
BULBSPECIFICATIONCHART
Power (watt)SpecificationLamp
21PY21WFront direction indicator
55H1Headlamp main beam
55H7Headlamp dipped beam
55H1Cornering lamp
5W5WSide repeater
5W5WApproach lamp
35H8Front fog lamp
5W5WSide lamp
21PY21WRear direction indicator
21H21WRear fog lamp
21P21WReversing lamp
5W5WNumber plate lamp
10FestoonInterior lamp
5BA9sReading lamp
69
Lighting
Power (watt)SpecificationLamp
5W5WVanity mirror lamp
6W6WLuggage compartment lamp
70
Lighting
ELECTRICWINDOWS
WARNING
Donot operate the electricwindowsunless they are free fromobstruction.
Note: If you operate the switches oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmight become inoperable for a certaintime to prevent damage due tooverheating.
Note: You can operate the windows forseveral minutes after you switch off theignition. They will be deactivated as soonas a door is opened.
Note: If you operate both the switch onthe relevant door and the switch for thatwindow on the driver’s door at the sametime, the window will stop moving.
Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric windows.
Global opening and globalclosing
You can also operate the electricwindowswith the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function. SeeGlobal opening and closing (page39).
Note:Global opening and global closingwill open or close the windowsautomatically only on vehicles equippedwith four electric windows.
Note: Global closing will only operate ifyou have set the memory correctly foreach window.
Driver’s door switches
E121510
You can operate all the windows with theswitches on the door trim panel of thedriver’s door.
Front and rear passengers’door switches
E70849
Opening and closing thewindows automatically
Press or lift the switch to the secondaction point and release it. Press or lift itagain to stop the windows.
71
Windows andmirrors
Safetyswitchforrearwindows
WARNING
On some vehicles, pressing theswitch will also lock the rear doorsfrom inside. See Child safety
locks (page 27).
Note: You can always operate the rearwindows from the driver’s door.
E121511
A switch in the driver’s door disables therear electric window switches.
The light in the switch illuminates and thelights in the rear window switches go offwhen the rear windows are disabled.
Anti-trap function
WARNING
Careless closingof thewindowscanoverride the protection function andcause injuries.
The electric windows will stopautomatically while closing and reversesome distance if there is an obstacle inthe way.
Overriding the anti-trap function
CAUTION
While you close the window for thethird time, the anti-trap function isdisabled. Make sure there are no
obstacles in the way of the closingwindow.
To override this protection function whenthere is a resistance, for example, in thewinter, proceed as follows:
1. Close the window twice until itreaches the resistance and let itreverse.
2. Close the window a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and you cannot close thewindowautomatically. Thewindowwilloverride the resistance and you canclose it fully.
3. If the window does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by aproperly trained technician.
Resetting thememory of theelectricwindows
WARNING
The anti-trap function is deactivateduntil you have reset the memory.
After the battery has been disconnectedfrom the vehicle you must reset thememory separately for each window:
1. Lift the switch until the window is fullyclosed. Hold the switch lifted for onemore second.
2. Release the switch and lift it again, twoor three times, for one more second.
3. Open the window and try to close itautomatically.
4. Reset and repeat procedure if thewindow does not close automatically.
72
Windows andmirrors
Safetymode
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure.
If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The windows willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the windowsby pressing the switch again when thewindows stopmoving. Have this checkedimmediately.
EXTERIORMIRRORS
WARNING
Do not overestimate the distanceof the objects that you see in theconvex mirror. Objects seen in
convex mirrors will appear smaller andfurther away than they actually are.
Manual foldingmirrors
Folding
Push themirror towards the doorwindowglass.
Unfolding
Make sure that you fully engage themirrorin its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.
ELECTRIC EXTERIORMIRRORS
A CB
E70846
Left-hand mirrorA
OffB
Right-hand mirrorC
Mirror tilting positions
E70847
The electric exteriormirrors are fittedwitha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass. See Heatedwindows andmirrors (page 113).
73
Windows andmirrors
Electric foldingmirrors
Automatic folding and unfolding
Note: If the mirrors have been foldedusing themanual fold button they can onlybe unfolded using themanual fold button.
The mirrors will fold automatically whenyou lock the vehicle with the key, theremote control or a keyless entry systemrequest. Themirrors will unfold when youunlock the vehicle with the key, theremote control, a keyless entry systemrequest, the driver's interior door handleor starting the engine.
Manual folding and unfolding
The electric folding mirrors operate withthe ignition on.
Note:Youcanoperate themirrors (mirrortilting and folding) for severalminutes afteryou switch off the ignition. They will bedeactivated as soon as a door is opened.
E72623
Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.
If you press the switch again while themirrors are moving, they will stop andreverse the direction of movement.
Note:When the mirrors are operatedoften during a short period of time, thesystem may become inoperable for aperiod of time to prevent damage due tooverheating.
Reversemirror dipping
Depending on the switch position (A orC), the relevant exterior mirror will dipwhenever you select reverse gear, givingyou a view of the kerb.
Note: You can disable this feature byleaving the switch in position B.The exterior mirror will return to theoriginal position:• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h
(6 mph).• Approximately 10 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged.• If the switch is returned to position B.
When you first use this feature, themirrorwill dip to a preset position. This positioncan be adjusted using the followingsequence:
1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start theengine.
2. Select the desired exterior mirror (Aor C).
3. Select reverse gear, the selectedexterior mirror will adjust to a presetposition.
4. Adjust the mirror to the requireddipped position.
5. Disengage reverse gear or press andhold the desired memory pre-setbutton until a single chime sounds toconfirm. SeeMemory function(page 130).
The settings will be stored automatically.
74
Windows andmirrors
AUTO-DIMMINGMIRROR
E71028
The auto-dimming mirror will adjustautomaticallywhen hit by glaring light frombehind. It will not work when you haveselected reverse gear.
BLINDSPOTMONITOR
Blind spot information system(BLIS)
WARNINGSThe system is not designed toprevent contact with other vehiclesor objects. The system only
provides a warning to assist you indetecting vehicles in the blind spot zones.The system will not detect obstacles,pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.
Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.
The system is a convenience feature thataids the driver in detecting vehicles thatmay have entered the blind spot zone (A).The detection area is on both sides of thevehicle extending rearwards from theexteriormirrors to approximately 3metres(10 feet) beyond the bumper. The systemwill alert you if certain vehicles enter theblind spot zone whilst driving.
A
A
E124788
Using the system
The system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.
E124736
Note:Both indicatorswill illuminate brieflywhen you switch the ignition on to confirmthat the system is operational.
Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the system is active only inS, D and N.The system is only active when youexceed 10 km/h (6 mph). The system istemporarily deactivated when you selectreverse gear.
75
Windows andmirrors
Systemdetection and alerts
The system will trigger the alert forvehicles that enter the blind spot zonefrom the rear or merge from the side.Vehicles that you pass, or vehicles thatenter the blind spot zone from the front,will only trigger the alert after the vehiclehas remained in the blind spot zone for ashort period of time.
Note: Vehicles that pass through theblind zone quickly (typically less than 2seconds) will not trigger the alert.
The systemconsists of two radar sensorseach located behind the rear wheelshidden behind the bumpers.
CAUTIONSDo not place items such as bumperstickers in this area.
Repairs to these areas using bodyfiller will affect the performance of thesystem.
E124741
Detection limitations
There may be certain instances wherevehicles entering andexiting the blind spotzones may not be detected.
Instances which may causenon-detection:• Debris build up on the rear bumper
panels in the area of the sensors.• Certain manoeuvring of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.• Vehicles passing through the blind
zone at high speed.• Severe weather conditions.
• Several vehicles passing through theblind zone following each otherclosely.
False alerts
Note: False alerts are temporary andwillself correct.
Theremay be certain instanceswhen thesystem will alert with no vehicle presentin the blind zone.
Circumstances where false alerts mayoccur:• Road guardrails.
• Motorway concrete walls.
• Construction areas.
• Sharp turns around a building.
• Bushes and trees.
• Cyclists and motorcyclists.
• Coming to a stop with a vehicledirectly behind but very close.
Turning the systemon and off
Note: The on or off position will remainuntil manually changed.
You can turn the system on and off usingthe information display. SeeInformation displays (page 84).
When you turn the system off no furtheralerts will be received. The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).
76
Windows andmirrors
Detection errors
Note: The alert indicator in the mirror willnot illuminate.
If the system senses a fault on eithersensor, the system warning symbol willilluminate and remain on. The informationdisplay will confirm the fault and indicatewhether the left or right side is affected.
Blocked sensor
WARNING
Prior to the system recognizing ablocked condition and issuing awarning, the number of missed
objects will increase.
CAUTION
The sensorsmay not detect vehiclesin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.
Note: Keep the rear bumper areasurrounding the sensors free fromdirt, iceand snow.
If a sensor becomes blocked the systemperformance may degrade. A blockedsensor message may be displayed.
The system will automatically return tonormal operation once twoother vehicleshave been detected on both sides.
Trailer towing false alerts
CAUTION
Vehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by usmay notcorrectly be detected. Switch the
system off to avoid false alerts. SeeInformation displays (page 84).
If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer towmodule approved by us, the system willdetect a connected trailer and deactivate.A confirmation message will be shown inthe information display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).The BLIS warning indicator will illuminate.SeeWarning lamps and indicators(page 80).
77
Windows andmirrors
GAUGES
Type 1 and2
BA C D
E72984
TachometerA
Engine coolant temperature gaugeB
Fuel gaugeC
SpeedometerD
78
Instruments
Type3
A B
CDEE130765
TachometerA
SpeedometerB
Engine coolant temperature gaugeC
Fuel gaugeD
Message centre. See Information displays (page 84).E
Engine coolant temperaturegauge
Note: On type 3 this gauge is shownwithin themessage centre andwill not bedisplayed unless required. SeeInformation displays (page 84).Shows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the indicator will remain in the centresection.
CAUTION
Do not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has beenresolved.
If the indicatormoves towards 120°C, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooleddown. See Engine coolant check(page 221).
79
Instruments
Fuel gauge
Note: On type 3 this gauge is shownwithin the message centre.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol tells you on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
WARNINGLAMPSANDINDICATORS
The following warning lamps andindicators will illuminate briefly when youswitch the ignition on to confirm that thesystem is operational:• ABS
• Airbag
• Blind spot monitor
• Brake system
• Coolant temperature
• Engine
• Frost
• Ignition
• Oil pressure
• Stability control (ESP).
If a warning or indicator lamp does notilluminate when the ignition is switchedon, it indicates a malfunction. Have thesystem checked by properly trainedtechnician.
ABSwarning lamp
If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue
to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.
Airbagwarning lamp
If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Have the system
checked by a properly trained technician.
Blind spotmonitor indicator
E124823
It will illuminatewhen this featureis switched off or in conjunctionwith a message. See Blind
spotmonitor (page 75). SeeInformationmessages (page 97).
Brake system lamp
It illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.
WARNING
Reduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so. Use your brakes with
care.
If it illuminateswhen you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates amalfunction. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.
Coolant temperaturewarninglamp
CAUTION
Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked
by a properly trained technicianimmediately.
80
Instruments
If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check thecoolant level. See Engine coolantcheck (page 221).
Direction indicators
Flashes during operation. Asudden increase in the rate offlashing warns of a failed
indicator bulb. See Changing a bulb(page 63).
Enginewarning lamp
If it illuminates with the enginerunning, this indicates amalfunction. If it flashes when
you are driving, reduce the speed ofyour vehicle immediately. If itcontinues to flash, avoid heavyacceleration or deceleration. Have thesystem checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.
CAUTION
If the enginewarning lamp illuminatesin conjunction with a message, havethe system checked as soon as
possible.
Forward alert indicator
E124824
It will illuminatewhen this featureis switched off. See Forwardalert function (page 172).
Front fog lamp indicator
It will illuminatewhen you switchthe front fog lamps on.
Frostwarning lamp
WARNING
Even if the temperature rises toabove 4ºC (39.2°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of
hazards caused by inclement weather.
It will illuminate and glow orangewhen the outside airtemperature is between 4ºC
(39.2ºF) and 0ºC (32ºF). It will glow redwhen the temperature is below 0ºC(32ºF).
Glowplug indicator
SeeStartingadieselengine(page 137).
Headlamp indicator
It will illuminatewhen you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.
Ignitionwarning lamp
If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Switch off all
unnecessary electrical equipment. Havethe systemchecked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.
Lane departurewarningindicator
It will illuminatewhen this featureis switched off or in conjunctionwith a message. The indicator
will go out when you switch the systemback on or when you switch the ignitionoff. See Lane departurewarning(page 177). See Informationmessages (page 97).
81
Instruments
Low fuel level warning lamp
If it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.
Main beam indicator
It will illuminatewhen you switchthe headlamp main beam on. Itwill flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Message indicator
It will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See
Informationmessages (page 97).
Oil pressurewarning lamp
CAUTION
Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked
by a properly trained technicianimmediately.
If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine oil check(page 221).
Rear fog lamp indicator
It will illuminatewhen you switchthe rear fog lamps on.
Seat belt reminder
See Seat belt reminder(page 32).
Shift indicator
It will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gearmay give better fuel economy
and lower CO2 emissions. It will notilluminate during periods of highacceleration, braking or when the clutchpedal is pressed.
Stability control (ESP)warninglamp
While driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it
does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicatesa malfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.
If you switch ESP off, the warning lampwill illuminate. The lamp will go out whenyou switch the system back on or whenyou switch the ignition off.
Start-stop indicator
It will illuminate to inform youwhen the engine shuts downorin conjunction with a message.
SeeUsingstart-stop (page 140). SeeInformationmessages (page 97).
AUDIBLEWARNINGSANDINDICATORS
Switching the chimes on andoff
You can deactivate certain chimes.
To set which chimes should sound:
82
Instruments
E70499
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightChimes and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight the chime and press theOKbutton to switch the chime on and off.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Press and hold the left arrowbutton to return to the main menudisplay.
83
Instruments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Do not operate the informationdisplay controls when the vehicle ismoving.
Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch offthe ignition.
Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the buttons on yoursteering wheel. Correspondinginformation is displayed in the informationdisplay.
For detailed instructions on audio,navigation, phone etc. refer to theappropriate manual.
Controls
E70499
Press the up and down arrow buttons:
• to scroll through the trip computerdisplays
• to scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.
Press the right arrow button:
• to enter the main menu from the tripcomputer displays
• to enter a sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.
Hold the left arrowbutton pressed at anytime to return to the main menu display(escape button).
Note: The system will return to the tripcomputer displays automatically if you donot press any button for a period of time.
Press theOK button to choose andconfirm a setting.
Instrument cluster functions
Type3Type2Type 1Function
XXXTrip computer
XXXInformation messages
XXXClock setup
XX-Display settings
XX-Park heater setup
84
Information displays
Type3Type2Type 1Function
X--Navigation control
X--CD control
X--CD changer control
X--Radio control
X--Phone control
X--Auxiliary input control
Type 1
E80604
Press the up and down arrow buttonson the steering wheel to scroll throughthe trip computer displays. See Tripcomputer (page 93).
85
Information displays
Menu structure
Information
Reset trip
BLIS
ECO MODE
Trip OdoAvg FuelAvg SpeedAll values
MessagesAuto StartStop
Gear ShiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info
Clock Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour ModeE131626
Type2
E74426
6.3Average Fuel
09:00
234.2 km
123456 km
l100km
Press the up and down arrow buttonson the steering wheel to scroll throughthe trip computer displays. See Tripcomputer (page 93).
86
Information displays
Menu structure
Reset Trip
BLISESP
Trip OdoAvg fuelAvg speedAll
Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info
EnglishDeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski
PortuguêsSvenska
Configure
Language
Measure unit
Display
Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour Mode
Always offOn guidanceAlways on
Messages
Tyre Press.Auto StartStop
MetricImperial
Help ScreenRadio InfoPhone InfoNAV info
Information
Clock
Setup
ECO MODE
BAE131627
87
Information displays
Chimes
Forw Alert
Low Fuel
Home lightGeneral warn.General info.
Low
OffHighNormal
Off
ManualAuto
Hill Launch
Check
High loadLow load
Tyre Pressure
Full guard
Ask on exitReduced
Alarm
Aux. Heater
Parkheater
BA
E87753
Set Time
SaturdaySunday
FridayThursday
MondayTuesdayWednesday
Set Time
SaturdaySunday
FridayThursday
MondayTuesdayWednesday
Time 1
Time 2
OnceActive now
88
Information displays
Type3
E88048
Use the controls to scroll through themenu displays.
Device list
The highlighted icon shows the currentmenu in use.
Navigation
CD
CD changer
Radio
Phone
Trip computer
Settings
Auxiliary input
89
Information displays
Menu structure
CD
Navigation HomeDestinat. mem.Destinat. A-ZLast destinat.Cancel guidan.
DestinationsDestinationsDestinations
Folder / Tracks
Folder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / Tracks
StationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStations
Numbers
NumbersNumbers
Station listFM 1 / FMFM 2FM 3FM - ASTMW / AMLW / AM-AST
CD changer CD 1CD 2CD 3CD 4CD 5CD 6
Radio
Phone bookRedialIncoming callsOutgoing callsCall status
Phone
AE131628
Trip computer Distance to emptyAverage fuelAverage speedReset selected elementReset trip odometer
90
Information displays
English
Colour themesConfigure
Language
Measure unit
DisplayDriver alert
Set Clock24-hour mode12-hour mode
Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedMore info
Always offOn guidanceAlways on
Messages
Tyre PressureCoolant temperature
Driver alertAuto StartStop
MetricImperial
Help ScreenNAV info
Settings
Information
Clock
Setup
ESPBLISECOMODE
A CBE131629
A
DeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski
PortuguêsSvenska
91
Information displays
Chimes Low Fuel
Home lightGeneral warn.General info.
Forw Alert LowNormalHighOff
Lane depart Sensitivity NormalHigh
Intensity HighNormalLow
Off
ManualAuto
Hill Launch
Check
High loadLow load
Tyre Pressure
Full guard
Ask on exitReduced
Alarm
Aux Heater
Auto beam OnSensitivity High
NormalLow
C
E131630
92
Information displays
Set Time
SaturdaySunday
WednesdayTuesday
FridayThursday
Monday
Set Time
SaturdaySunday
WednesdayTuesday
FridayThursday
Monday
Time 1
Time 2
OnceActive now
Park heater
Auxiliary input
BA
E88067
TRIPCOMPUTER
Odometer
Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.
Tripmeter
Registers the mileage of individualjourneys.
Distance to empty
Indicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.
Average fuel consumption
Indicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.
Average speed
Indicates the average speed calculatedsince the function was last reset.
Outside air temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
93
Information displays
Type 1 and2
E74428
6.3Average Fuel
10:20
234.2 km
123456 km
l100km
A
B
C
A. Trip computerB. OdometerC. Tripmeter
The trip computer includes the followinginformation displays:
Average fuel
Average speed
Outside air
Reset Trip
Dist. to empty
E74441
Press the up and down arrow buttonson the steering wheel to scroll throughthe trip computer displays.
Note: The position of the trip computerdisplay may vary depending on theinformation shown in the display.
Resetting the trip computer usingthemainmenu
To reset a particular display:
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. Highlight Reset Tripwith the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.
3. Highlight the function to be reset.
4. Press the right arrow button to selectthe function.
5. Hold theOK button pressed.
To reset all three displays, select Allvalues and hold theOK button pressed.
Type3
E88049A
Trip computerA
Press theOK button on the steeringwheel to cycle through the different tripcomputer displays. To reset a value, pressand hold theOK button.
Resetting the trip computer usingthemainmenu
To reset a particular display:
1. HighlightTripComputerwith the upand down arrow buttons and pressthe right arrow button.
94
Information displays
2. Highlight the function to be reset.
3. Hold theOK button pressed.
PERSONALISEDSETTINGS
The following information is displayed inthe information display if you haveselected it:
Help screen, radio, navigationand phone information
The help screen appears for a fewsecondswhen you switch the ignition on.
If the radio, navigation or telephone isoperating, information relating to thissystem is displayed in the informationdisplay.
To select which information is displayedin the information display:
Type 1 and2
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.
5. To toggle the Help screen, RadioInfo and Phone Info on and off,highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.
Type3
1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.
5. To toggle theHelpscreen andNAVInfo on and off, highlight the desiredsetting and press theOK button toconfirm the setting.
Navigation information
You can also choosewhen the navigationinformation is displayed in the informationdisplay. Three options are available:
• Always off: No navigationinformation is displayed in theinformation display.
• Onguidance: The navigationinformation will only appear when thenavigation system provides aguidance instruction. This function isonly available on certain navigationsystems.
• Always on: Navigation informationwill always appear in the informationdisplay when the navigation system isoperating.
To setwhennavigation information shouldbe displayed:
Type 1 and2
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
95
Information displays
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.
5. HighlightNavInfo and press the rightarrow button.
6. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
7. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.
Type3
1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press theright arrow button.
5. HighlightNavInfo and press the rightarrow button.
6. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
Language
A choice of eleven languages areavailable:
English, German, Italian, French, Spanish,Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedishand Portuguese.
Type 1 and2
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Language and press theright arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.
Type3
1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. Highlight Language and press theright arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
Units ofmeasure
Note: The outside air temperature is onlydisplayed in degrees Celsius and cannotbe set to degrees Fahrenheit.
To select metric or imperial units:
Type 1 and2
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
96
Information displays
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. HighlightMeasureUnit and pressthe right arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the left arrow button to returnto exit the menu. Hold the left arrowbutton pressed to return to the tripcomputer display.
Type3
1. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightDisplay and press the rightarrow button.
4. HighlightMeasureUnit and pressthe right arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
INFORMATIONMESSAGES
E70499
PressOK to acknowledge and removesome messages from the informationdisplay. Other messages will be removedautomatically after a short time.
With instrument cluster type 3, certainmessages need to be confirmed beforeyou can access the menus.
Message indicator
The message indicatorilluminates to supplement somemessages. It will be red or
amber depending on the severity of themessage and will remain on until thecause of themessage has been rectified.
Message symbols
See Owner’s handbook.
Have the system checked atthe next service.
Have the system checked assoon as possible.
Stop your vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so.
Viewing currentmessages
Type 1 and2
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. Highlight Information with the upand down arrow buttons and pressthe right arrow button.
3. HighlightMessages and press theright arrow button.
4. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.
Type3
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
97
Information displays
2. Highlight Settings with the up anddown arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.
3. Highlight Information with the upand down arrow buttons and pressthe right arrow button.
4. HighlightMessages and press theright arrow button.
5. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.
Active suspension
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.
amberIVDC malfunction
See Active suspension (page 159).-IVDC comfort
See Active suspension (page 159).-IVDC normal
See Active suspension (page 159).-IVDC sport
Airbag
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberAirbag malfunction
Alarm
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Alarm (page 45).amberAlarm triggered
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.
-Alarm systemservice reqd.
Automaticmainbeamcontrol,LanedeparturewarningandDriveralert
ActionIndicatorMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.redDriver fatigueRest now
98
Information displays
ActionIndicatorMessage
The front camera sensor has reduced visibility.Clean the windscreen.
amberFront cameraClean screen
The front camera sensor has malfunctioned.Have this checked as soon as possible.
amberFront cameramalfunction
The affected systems are temporarily unavail-able, and should resume after a few minutes.
amberFront cameranot available
Take a rest break soon.amberDriver fatigueRest suggested
The system has malfunctioned. Have thischecked as soon as possible.
amberLane departurewarn. malfunct.
Battery and charging system
ActionIndicatorMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch off the ignition. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technician as
soon as possible.
red
Overvoltage: Stopsafely!
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberLow battery
Blind spotmonitor
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Blind spotmonitor (page 75).amberBLIS sensorblocked
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS right sensor
malfunction
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS left sensor
malfunction
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS malfunction
See Blind spotmonitor (page 75).amberBLIS inactive Trailerattach'd
99
Information displays
Child power lock
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberChild lockmalfunc-
tion
Climate control
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Auxiliary heater (page 113).amberAux. Heater on
Cruise control andAdaptive cruise control (ACC)
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberACC malfunction
See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page167).
amberClean radar sensor
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberForward Alertmalfunction
See Cruise control (page 165).-Cruise controlactive
See Cruise control (page 165).-Cruise controlstandby
See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page167).
-ACC unavailable
Doors open
ActionIndicatorMessage
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.
redDriver door open
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.
redDriver side reardoor open
100
Information displays
ActionIndicatorMessage
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.
redPassenger dooropen
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.
redPassenger siderear door open
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.
redLuggage comp.open
Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close. SeeOpening and
closing the bonnet (page 210).
redBonnet open
Engine immobiliser
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Engine immobiliser (page 44).amberImmobiliser active
Hill start assist
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.
amberHill Launch notavailable
See Hill start assist (page 156).amberPlease use parkbrake !
See Hill start assist (page 156).-Hill Launch Assistactive
See Hill start assist (page 156).-Hill Launch Assistoff
Keyless system
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have this checked as soon as possible.redSteering malfunc-tion
See Keyless entry (page 41).amberKey not detected
101
Information displays
ActionIndicatorMessage
The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off.See Keyless starting (page 133).
amberCar operativePress STOP
See Keyless entry (page 41).amberKey outside car
SeeChangingtheremotecontrolbattery(page 34).
amberKey battery low
See Steeringwheel lock (page 135).-Steering locked -Retry
Lighting
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberFront lightsmalfunction
One or both of the headlamp dipped beambulbs have blown. Check the headlamp dippedbeambulbs. SeeChangingabulb (page63).
-Low beam: Bulbfault
One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs haveblown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See
Changing a bulb (page 63).
-Rear fog light: Bulbfault
Oneor both of the brake lampbulbs haveblown.Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing
a bulb (page 63).
-Stop lamps: Bulbfault
One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on yourtrailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs
on your trailer.
-Trailer stopl.: Bulbfault
One or both of the direction indicator bulbs onyour trailer have blown. Check the direction
indicator bulbs on your trailer.
-Trailer turnl.: Bulbfault
Maintenance
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
redEnginemalfunction
102
Information displays
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Engine oil check (page 221).amberCheck engine oillevel
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberWater detected infuel
SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).-Low washer fluidlevel
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.
-Service oil
Occupant protection
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
-Crash mode
Parking brake
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Parking brake (page 153).redPark brake applied
See Parking brake (page 153).amberPark brake applied
Power steering
ActionIndicatorMessage
Full steering will bemaintained but youwill needto exert greater force on the steering wheel.Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
amberPower steeringmalfunction
103
Information displays
Stability control (ESP)
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
-ESP malfunction
See Using stability control (page 154).-ESP off
Start-stop
ActionMessageindicatorMessage
Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicleif the system has shut down the engine. SeeUsing start-stop (page 140).
redAuto StartStop Switchign off
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.amberAuto StartStop
malfunction
The engine needs to be restarted, press theclutch pedal to start. See Using start-stop(page 140).
-Auto StartStop Pressclutch
Select neutral for the system to restart theengine. See Using start-stop (page 140).-Auto StartStop Select
neutral
The system is not functioning. A manual restartis required.-StartStop: Man. start
required
Transmission
ActionIndicatorMessage
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.
redTransmissionmalfunction
Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
amberTransmission over-temperatur
104
Information displays
Tyre pressuremonitoring system
ActionIndicatorMessage
The tyre indicated has continued to deflate.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recom-
mendedpressure. SeeTechnicalspecifica-tions (page 240).
redCheck ..... tyre!
One ormore of the tyres are significantly under-inflated. This message may be displayed aftera new sensor has been installed. Check thetyres and inflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technical specifications
(page 240).
redCheck tyre pres-sures
The tyre indicated is significantly under-inflated.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recom-
mendedpressure. SeeTechnicalspecifica-tions (page 240).
amberCheck ..... tyre
You have installed a temporary spare wheel.Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with asensor as soon as possible.When amalfunctionoccurs, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tyre pressure.
amberTyre monitormalfunction
Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, anunapproved accessory is interfering with thesystem or a general malfunction has beendetected. Have the system checked by a
properly trained technician as soon as possible.When a malfunction occurs, the system maynot be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure.
The tyre pressures are not suitable for drivingat 160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tyres to therecommended pressure. See Technical
specifications (page 240). Thismessagewillbe displayed for only a few seconds with a low
tyre pressure warning.
amberInflate tyres for highspeed
You have installed wheels and tyres that do nothave sensors. The tyre pressures will not be
monitored.
-Tyre sensors notdetected
All sensors have malfunctioned or an unap-proved accessory is interferingwith the system.Have the system checked by a properly trained
technician as soon as possible.
105
Information displays
Voice control
ActionIndicatorMessage
See Voice control (page 257).-Voice controlPlease speak
See Voice control (page 257).-Voice control Notrecognised
See Voice control (page 257).-Voice control Notallowed
106
Information displays
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
Outside air
Keep the air intakes forward of thewindscreen free from obstruction (snow,leaves etc.) to allow the climate controlsystem to function effectively.
Recirculated air
CAUTION
Prolonged use of recirculated airmaycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings
for defrosting and demisting thewindscreen.
The air currently in the passengercompartmentwill be recirculated. Outsideair will not enter the vehicle.
Heating
Heating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.
Air conditioning
Note: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 4ºC(39ºF).
Note: If you use the air conditioning, thefuel consumption of your vehicle will behigher.
Air is directed through the evaporatorwhere it is cooled. Humidity is extractedfrom the air to help keep thewindows freeof mist. The resulting condensation isdirected to the outside of the vehicle andit is therefore normal if you see a smallpool of water under your vehicle.
General information oncontrolling the interior climate
Fully close all the windows.
Warming the interior
Direct the air towards your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct someof the air towards thewindscreen and thedoor windows.
Cooling the interior
Direct the air towards your face.
AIR VENTS
Front air vents
E71942
Rear air vents
BA
E89129
OpenA
CloseB
107
Climate control
MANUALCLIMATECONTROL
Air distribution control
A
F B
C
D
E
E71379
WindscreenA
Footwell and windscreenB
FootwellC
Face level and footwellD
Face levelE
Face level and windscreenF
You can set the air distribution control toany position between the symbols.
Blower
E75470
A
OffA
Note: If you switch the blower off, thewindscreen may mist up.
Recirculated air
Press the button to toggle betweenoutside air and recirculated air.
Heating the interior quickly
E71377
108
Climate control
Ventilation
E71378
Set the air distribution control, blower andair vents to suit your requirements.
Air conditioning
Switching the air conditioning onand off
If you turn the blower off, the airconditioning will turn off. When you turnthe blower on again, the air conditioningwill come on automatically.
Coolingwith outside air
E71380
Cooling the interior quickly
E71381
Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen
E71382
When the temperature is above 4°C(39°F), the air conditioning will switch onautomatically. Make sure that the bloweris on. The indicator in the switch willilluminate during defrosting anddemisting.
If you move the air distribution control toa position other than A, the A/C willremain on.
You can switch the air conditioning andrecirculated air on and off while the airdistribution control is set to position A.
If necessary, switch the heated windowson. See Heatedwindows andmirrors (page 113).
109
Climate control
Reducing interior air humidity
E71383
AUTOMATICCLIMATECONTROL
E91390
The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts themaccordingto the driving and weather conditions.Pressing theAUTObuttononce switcheson the auto mode.
The system in your vehicle is dual-zoneautomatic climate control. When thesystem is in mono mode, all thetemperature zones are linked to thedriver's zone. When you switch monomode off, the dual-zone system allowsyou to set different temperatures for thedriver's and front passenger's side.
Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot orcold. The automatic climate controladjusts to the current circumstancesautomatically. For the system to functionproperly, the side and centre vents shouldbe fully open.
Note: The sunload sensor is located ontop of the instrument panel. Do not coverthe sensor with any objects.
Note:At lowoutside temperatures,whenthe system is in automode, the air streamwill be directed to thewindscreen and theside windows as long as the engine iscold.
110
Climate control
Note: For information on the automaticclimate control, on vehicles fitted with acombined Navigation and automaticclimate control system, see separatehandbook.
Setting the temperature
E91391
You can set the temperature between15.5ºC (60°F) and 29.5ºC (85°F) in stepsof 0.5ºC (1°F). In position LO, 15ºC (59°F),the system will switch to permanentcooling. In position HI, 30°C (86°F), thesystem will switch to permanent heating.
Note: If either position LO or HI isselected, the system will not regulate astable temperature.
Monomode
In monomode, the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’sside, the settings will be adjusted to thesame setting on the passenger’s side. Inmono mode,MONO appears in thedisplay.
To switchmonomodeoff
Select a temperature for the passenger’sside with the rotary control on thepassenger’s side. Monomodewill switchoff andMONO disappears from thedisplay. The temperature for the driver’ssidewill remain unchanged. You can nowadjust the driver and passenger sidetemperatures independently of eachanother. The temperature settings foreach side are shown in the display. Youcan set a temperature difference of up to4ºC (7°F).
Note: If you set a temperature differenceof greater than 4ºC (7°F), the temperatureon the other side will be adjusted so thatthe difference remains 4ºC (7°F).
Note: If you set one of the sides toHI orLO, both sides will be set to HI or LO.
To switchmonomodeback on
To switchmonomodeback on, press theMONO button.MONO reappears in thedisplay and the passenger’s sidetemperature will be adjusted to thedriver’s side temperature.
Blower
Use the buttons to adjust the blowerspeed.
The blower setting is indicated in thedisplay.
To return to automode, press theAUTObutton.
111
Climate control
Air distribution
To adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. Any combination of settings canbe selected simultaneously.
E70308
A B C
FootwellA
Face levelB
WindscreenC
When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, A, B and C switch offautomatically and the air conditioningswitches on. Outside air will flow into thevehicle. You cannot select recirculatedair.
Windscreen defrosting anddemisting
E91392
Press the windscreen defrosting anddemisting button. Outside air will flow intothe vehicle. Air conditioning isautomatically selected. As long as the airdistribution is set to this position, youcannot select recirculated air.
The blower speed and the temperaturecontrol operate automatically and cannotbe adjusted manually. The blower is setto high speed and the temperature toHI.
When you select windscreen defrostinganddemisting, the heated screens switchon automatically and switch off after ashort time.
To return to automode, press theAUTObutton.
Switching the air conditioningon and off
E91393
Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioningonandoff.A/COFF appearsin the display when the air conditioning isswitched off.
A/CON appears in the display when theair conditioning is switched on.
Recirculated air
Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween outside air and recirculated air.
Note:When the system is in auto modeand the interior and exterior temperaturesare quite hot, the system selectsrecirculated air automatically tomaximisecooling of the interior. Once the selectedtemperature is reached, the system willreselect outside air automatically.
Switching off the automaticclimate control
E91394
Press theOFF button.
When switchedoff, the heating, ventilationand air conditioning system is switchedoff and recirculated air is selected.
112
Climate control
HEATEDWINDOWSANDMIRRORS
Heatedwindows
Use the heated windows to defrost ordemist the windscreen or rear window.
Note: The heatedwindowsoperate onlywhen the engine is running.
Heatedwindscreen
E72506
Heated rearwindow
E72507
Heated exteriormirrors
Electric exterior mirrors are fitted with aheating element thatwill defrost or demistthe mirror glass. They will switch onautomaticallywhen you switch the heatedrear window on.
AUXILIARYHEATER
Parking heater
WARNING
The parking heater must not beoperated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or
dust or in enclosed spaces.
The parking heater operatesindependently of the vehicle heater byheating the engine’s coolant circuit. It isfed from the vehicle fuel tank. You canalso use it while the vehicle is in motion tohelp the vehicle heater warm up theinterior more quickly.
Used properly, the parking heaterprovides the following benefits:
• It preheats the interior of the vehicle.
• It keeps the windows clear of ice inthe event of frost and preventscondensation.
• It avoids cold starts and allows theengine to reach operatingtemperature sooner.
Note: The parking heater will onlyoperate if there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6gallons) of fuel in the fuel tank and theambient temperature is below 15°C(59°F). The heater will not operate if thebattery is low.
Note: The heating depends on theoutside air temperature.
Note:When the parking heater isactivated, exhaust fumesmay come fromunder the sides of the vehicle. This isnormal.
Note:On vehicleswith amanual heating,ventilation and air conditioning system,the heating of the vehicle interior isdependent on the temperature, airdistribution and blower control settings.
To prevent the battery from discharging:
• Once the parking heater hasperformedone heating cycle, the nextprogrammed heating cycle will onlybe carried out if you have started thevehicle’s engine in between.
• After a heating cycle, drive the vehiclefor at least the period of the heatingcycle.
Programming the parking heater
Note: The programmed time is the timeat which you wish the vehicle to be warmand ready to drive, not the time at whichthe heater switches on.
113
Climate control
Note: You must programme the timesat least 70minutes in advance of the timeyou wish to set.
Note: You must set the time and datecorrectly. See Clock (page 127).To programme the heating times:
E70499
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightParkHeater and press theright arrow button.
E74467
One-Time
Program 1Program 2
Active now
Park Heater
• The functions Program 1 andProgram2 allow you to programmeup to two heating cycles for each dayof the week. These times will remainstored and the heaterwill warmup thevehicle at these times on these daysevery week.
• The functionOne-Time allows youto programme one heating cycle forone specific day.
• The function Active nowautomatically switches on the heater.
Programming the functionsProgram 1 andProgram2
E74468
FridayThursday
TuesdayMonday
Wednesday
[07:55]
Program 1
1. Highlight Program 1 and press theright arrow button.
2. Highlight the day on which the heatershould warm up the vehicle.
3. Press theOK button to confirm theselection. A cross appears in the boxnext to the day to show that this dayis selected.
4. Continue in the sameway to select allthe days on which the heater shouldwarm up the vehicle.
114
Climate control
5. To set the time at which the vehicleshould be warmed up, highlight thetime at the top of the display andpress the right arrow button.
6. Press theOK button and the hoursflash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.
7. When you have finished, press theOKbutton again to confirm the selection.
E74469
07:5501:12:2006
ParkheaterProgram 1
OK = change
You can use the function Program2 toset a second cycle, for example differenttimes on different days or twice on thesame day. The programming procedureis the same as for the functionProgram1.
Programming the functionOne-Time
1. HighlightOne-Time and press theright arrow button.
2. Press theOK button and the hoursflash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.
3. When you have finished, press theOKbutton again to confirm the selection.
Active now
HighlightActivenow and press theOKbutton. A cross appears in the box nextto the function to show that the heater isactivated.
To deactivate the heater, highlightActivenow and press theOK button again.
Remote starting
The parking heater may be started andswitched off from a distance of up to 500metres (1640 feet) using the suppliedremote control transmitter. This rangewillvary depending upon local conditions andterrain, as well as battery condition. Theremote control transmitter will indicatewhether or not the signal has beenreceived. The parking heater will operatefor a maximum of 30 minutes.
Note: The heaterwill operate, dependingon the ambient temperature, for between10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cooldown after the heating period haselapsed, therefore a remote start morethan 30 minutes before driving is notrecommended.
Note: The remote control may notalways receive confirmation of asuccessful remotecommandat extendedoperating ranges.
Starting
Hold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the ON button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up green to confirm thesignal has been received.
Switching off
Hold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the OFF button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up red to confirm thesignal has been received.
115
Climate control
Remote start in combinationwith direct start or timer
E114360
Remote start is integrated with normalheater control. Parking heaters startedwith direct start or timer functions can beswitched off with the remote controltransmitter and vice versa.
Feedback during starting andswitching off
The LED on the transmitter illuminatesgreen for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal has been received bythe vehicle and the heater has started.
The LEDon the transmitter illuminates redfor about two seconds. This indicates thesignal has been received by the vehicleand the heater has switched off.
The LED on the transmitter flashes greenor red for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal was not transmittedcorrectly. Repeat the transmission.
The LED on the transmitter illuminatesorange for about two seconds beforeshowing green or red. This indicates thetransmitter batteries areweak and shouldbe changed.
The LEDon the transmitter flashes orangefor about 5 seconds. This indicates thatthe signal was not transmitted. Thetransmitter batteries are discharged andshould be changed as soon as possible.
Changing the remote controlbattery
Make sure that you dispose of oldbatteries in an environmentally friendlyway. Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.
E114361
2
1
1. Insert a screwdriver or other suitabletool into the slot on the back of theremote control, and unscrew thecompartment cover.
CAUTION
Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.
2. Carefully prise out the battery.
3. Install a new battery (3.3V typeCR1-3N) with the + facing upwards.
4. Re-assemble the remote control.
Programming the transmitter
Further transmittersmay be usedwith theremote system, please consult yourdealer. Up to a maximum of 3 separateremote controls may be added. Whenadding extra transmitters these must beprogrammed separately.
Note: The heater must be switched offduring programming.
116
Climate control
Note:Theprogrammingproceduremaybe repeated as often as is required. Theoldest programmed transmitter will bedeleted each time.
1. Install the battery in the newtransmitter.
2. Turn off the power to the receiver byremoving fuse F32 from the enginecompartment fuse box. See Fusespecification chart (page 196).
3. Wait for at least 5 seconds.
4. Reconnect power to the receiver byreplacing the fuse, and press the OFFbutton on the new transmitter within5 seconds until the LED light turns off.
5. The new transmitter is nowprogrammed.
Fuel operated heater(depending on country)
WARNING
The fuel operated heater must notbe operated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or
dust or in enclosed spaces.
The fuel operated heater aids in warmingthe engine and the vehicle interior onvehicleswith a diesel engine. It is switchedon or off automatically depending on theoutside air temperature and the coolanttemperature, unless youhavedeactivatedit. When the fuel operated heater isoperating, Aux. Heater on is displayedin the information display. SeeInformation displays (page 84).
To deactivate the fuel operated heater:
E70499
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownarrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. HighlightAux.Heater and press theOKbutton to toggle the heater on andoff. A cross appears in the box whenthe heater is activated.
4. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.
Diesel auxiliary heater(depending on country)
The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electricalheater) aids inwarming the vehicle interioron vehicles with a diesel engine. It isswitched on or off automaticallydependingon theoutside air temperature,the coolant temperature and thealternator load.
117
Climate control
ELECTRICSUNROOF
E78054
WARNING
Before operating the electricsunroof you should verify it is free ofobstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in theproximity of the sunroof opening. Failureto do so could result in serious personalinjury. It is the primary responsibility of thesupervising adults to never leave a childunattended in a vehicle and to never leavethe keys in an unattended vehicle.
Note:When the switches are operatedoften during a short period of time, thesystem might become inoperable for acertain time to prevent damage due tooverheating.
Note: The electric sunroof can also beoperatedwith the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function. SeeGlobal opening and closing (page39).
There are two ways of opening thesunroof – the rear of the sunroof lifts openor the sunroof opens from the front,sliding back under the roof. The sunroofopens and closes whilst the switch ispressed.
Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric sunroof.
The power sunroof is operated by aswitch located between the sun visors.
Opening and closing thesunroof
E72188
E72185
B
A
Press to closeA
Press to openB
118
Climate control
Tilting the sunroof
E72189
E72185
B
A
Press to openA
Press to closeB
Opening and closing thesunroof automatically
Note:When opening automatically, thesunroofwill stop about 8 cm from the fullyopened position. This position reducesthe buffeting noise which is sometimesheard when the sunroof is fully open. Thesunroof will only stop automatically in thisposition when the sunroof is openedautomatically.
To open or close the sunroofautomatically press either side of theswitch to the second action point andrelease it completely. Press again to stop.
When the closed position is reached, thesunroof stops automatically.
Sunroof anti-trap protection
WARNINGSThe anti-trap function is deactivateduntil the memory has been reset.Careless closing of the window can
cause injuries.
Careless closing of the electricsunroof can override the anti-trapprotection and cause injuries.
The sunroof will stop automatically whileclosing and reverse somedistance if thereis an obstacle in the way.
To override anti-trap protection whenthere is a resistance, e. g. in the winter,proceed as follows:
WARNING
While the sunroof is being closed forthe third time, the anti-trap functionis disabled. Make sure there are no
obstacles in the way of the closingsunroof.
Close the sunroof a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and the sunroof cannot beclosed automatically. The sunroof willoverride the resistance and can then beclosed fully.
If the sunroof does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by anexpert.
119
Climate control
Sunroof safetymode
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make surethat there are no obstacles in the
way of the closing sunroof.
If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The sunroof willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the sunroofby pressing the button again when thesunroof stops moving. When the rear ofthe sunroof is lifted, lift the rear all the wayand then close the sunroof. Have thesystem checked by an expertimmediately.
Sunroof relearning
WARNING
The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make surethat there are no obstacles in the
way of the closing sunroof.
In case the sunroof no longer closesproperly, follow this relearning procedure:
• Tilt the rear of the sunroof as far aspossible. Release the button.
• Press and hold the samebutton againfor 30 seconds until you see thesunroof move.
• Release the button and immediatelypress and hold it again. The sunroofwill close, open fully and then closeagain. Do not release the buttonbefore the sunroof has reached theclosed position for the second time.
If the button is not pressed continuously,the relearning functionwill be interrupted.Start the procedure once more from thebeginning.
120
Climate control
SITTING IN THECORRECTPOSITION
E68595
WARNINGSDo not adjust the seats when thevehicle is moving.
Only when you use the seat beltproperly, can it hold you in a positionthat allows the airbag to achieve its
optimum effect.
When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seat belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a collision. We recommend that you:
• sit in an upright position with the baseof your spine as far back as possible.
• do not recline the seatbackmore than30 degrees.
• adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forwards as possible,remaining comfortable.
• keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 250millimetres (10 inches) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.
• hold the steeringwheelwith your armsslightly bent.
• bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.
• position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the centre of your shoulderand position the lap strap tightlyacross your hips.
Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you canmaintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.
MANUALSEATS
Moving the seats backwardsand forwards
E70728
WARNING
Rock the seat backwards andforwards after releasing the lever tomake sure that it is fully engaged in
its catch.
121
Seats
Adjusting the lumbar support
E70729
Adjusting the height of thedriver’s seat
E70730
Adjusting the angle of theseatback
E70731
ELECTRICSEATS
2-way electric seat
E70733
1
1
2
2
122
Seats
8-way electric seat
12 2 1 3
4
3
4
8 7
8 7
5
6
5
6E70734
123
Seats
HEADRESTRAINTS
Adjusting the head restraint
WARNINGSRaise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.
When using a forward facing childrestraint on a rear seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that
seat.
E71879
Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head andas far forwards as possible, remainingcomfortable.
Removing the head restraint
Press the locking buttons and remove thehead restraint.
REARSEATS
WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and
seat frame.
Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.
Folding the seatbacks down
CAUTION
Lower the head restraints.
1
2
1
E86611
1. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.
2. Push the seatback forwards.
Creating a level load floor
WARNING
Make sure the red indicator is notshowingwhen you engage the seatin the catches.
124
Seats
CAUTION
Lower the head restraints.
2
13
2
E86612
1. Insert your fingers between the seatcushion and seatback and fold theseat cushion forwards.
2. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.
3. Push the seatback forwards.
Folding the seatbacks up
WARNING
When folding the seatbacks up,make sure that the belts are visibleto an occupant and not caught
behind the seat.
HEATEDSEATS
CAUTION
Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.
E70601
E71224
Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.
Note: The heater setting is indicated inred.
Note:When no light is illuminated, theheating is switched off.
Note: Only the front seat settings arestored when you switch off the ignition.
Raising and lowering thetemperature automatically
Press and hold the relevant button.
125
Seats
Raising and lowering thetemperaturemanually
Press the relevant button repeatedly.
VENTILATEDSEATS
CAUTION
Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.
E70601
E70602
Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.
Note: The ventilation setting is indicatedin blue.
Note:When no light is illuminated, theventilation is switched off.
Note: The settings are stored when theignition is switched off.
Note:When the seat is being ventilated,the heater may switch on automatically.This is to prevent the flow of air becominguncomfortably cool.
Note: The air in the vehicle interior is usedto ventilate the seats. The cooling effecttherefore depends on the temperatureof the vehicle interior. Switch on the airconditioning if necessary and set the airdistribution to footwell. See Climatecontrol (page 107).
Raising and lowering thetemperature automatically
Press and hold the relevant button.
Raising and lowering thetemperaturemanually
Press the relevant button repeatedly.
126
Seats
SUNBLINDS
Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks(A).
Sidewindows
E74809
AA
Rearwindow
AA
E86514
INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER
E70723
CLOCK
Note: Some navigation systems willautomatically set the date and time on theclock using GPS signals.
Note: SeeGeneral information (page84).
1. From themainmenu, select the clockfunction.
2. Select the option required.
3. PressOK.4. Using the right, left, up and down
arrow buttons, select and change thevalue.
5. PressOK.
CIGAR LIGHTER
CAUTIONSIf you use the socket when theengine is not running, the batterymay discharge.
Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.
127
Convenience features
Note: Switch the ignition on to use thecigar lighter. You can also use it for up to30 minutes after you have switched theignition off.
Note: You can use the socket to power12 volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use onlyFord accessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standardsockets.
E72972
Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.
ASHTRAY
Front ashtray
E72974
To empty, pull out the complete ashtray.
Rear ashtray
E73705
To remove the ashtray, open it, press itdown against the spring and remove it.
AUXILIARYPOWERSOCKETS
CAUTION
If you use the socket when theengine is not running, the batterymay discharge.
Note: You can use the socket when theignition is switched off.
Note: You can use the socket to power12 volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use onlyFord accessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standardsockets.
128
Convenience features
E86470
CUPHOLDERS
WARNING
Do not place hot drinks in the cupholders when the vehicle is moving.
GLOVEBOX
Cooled glove box
Note: You can cool the glove box usingair from the air conditioning system.
E70885
STORAGECOMPARTMENTS
WARNING
Do not drive with any storagecompartment lid open. Make surethat you secure the lid before
setting off.
CAUTION
Donot keepheat-sensitive items andliquids in any storage compartment.
E73704 E72905
E72905
129
Convenience features
MAPPOCKETS
E74686
MEMORYFUNCTION
WARNINGSBefore activating the seat memory,make sure that the area immediatelysurrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants areclear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory storefunctionwhen the vehicle ismoving.
A
B
E86768
Seat adjustment controls SeeElectric seats (page 122).
A
Memory pre-set buttonsB
Up to four different driver's seat andexterior mirror positions can be stored inthe memory. Your preferred setting forthe reversemirror dipping feature can alsobe stored. See Electric exteriormirrors (page 73).
Setting amemory pre-set
Passive setting
The vehicle stores the seating and mirrorpositions for up to four remote controlsor passive keys. Next time the vehicle isunlocked, the position of the seat andmirrorswill adjust to the last used position.
Each time you turn the ignition off, thecurrent seat andmirror settings are storedon the remote control or passive keyused.
Active setting
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat and exteriormirrors tothe desired position.
130
Convenience features
3. Press and hold the desired pre-setbutton B until a single chime soundsto confirm.
Recallingastoredseatposition
Note: To stop seat movement during arecall, press any driver seat adjustmentcontrol, any of thememory buttons or anymirror control switch. Seatmovementwillalso stop if you move the vehicle.
Passive recall
Note: If more than one passive key is inrange, the memory function will move tothe settings of the first key stored.
When you unlock the vehicle with theremote control or pull the driver doorhandle with a passive key in range, theseat and mirrors will move to the positionstored on that remote control or passivekey.
Active recall
Press the pre-set button associated withthe desired driving position. The seat andmirrors will move to the position storedon that pre-set.
Resetting thememory
If any seat position travel is interrupted(e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss ofpower supply), you will need to reset thememory.
Note:Make sure all electrical accessoriesare switched off.
1. Turn the ignition to position II.2. Operate the seat adjustment control
to move the seat in the requireddirection until it stops. See Electricseats (page 122). A clickwill beheard.
3. Release the seat adjustment controland immediately press and hold theswitch in the same direction for atleast 3 seconds. Keep it held until theseat stops at the mechanical end ofits travel and a click is heard.
4. Release the seat adjustment control.
5. Operate the same seat adjustmentcontrol in the opposite direction for atleast 3 seconds. Keep it held until theseat stops at the mechanical end ofits travel and a click is heard.
GLASSESHOLDER
E131605
CDCHANGER
This is located in the luggagecompartment.
131
Convenience features
AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN)SOCKET
E71969
See separate audio handbook.
USBPORT
E104423
See Connectivity (page 275).
FLOORMATS
WARNING
When using the floor mats, alwaysmake sure the floor mat is properlysecured using the appropriate
fixings and positioned so that it does notinterfere with the operation of the pedals.
132
Convenience features
GENERAL INFORMATION
General points on starting
If the battery has been disconnected thevehicle may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approx. 8 kilometres(5 miles) after reconnecting the battery.
This is because the engine managementsystemmust realign itself with the engine.Any unusual driving characteristics duringthis period may be disregarded.
Starting the engine by towingor pushing
WARNING
To prevent damage you must notpush or tow start your vehicle. Usebooster cables and a booster
battery. See Using booster cables(page 228).
IGNITIONSWITCH
WARNING
Never return the key to position 0or I when the vehicle is in motion.
E72128
0 The ignition is off.
I The ignition and all main electrical circuitsare disabled.
Note:Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long to avoid dischargingthe battery.
II The ignition is switched on. All electricalcircuits are operational. Warning lampsand indicators illuminate. This is the keyposition when driving. You must alsoselect it when being towed.
III The starter motor is activated. Releasethe key as soon as the engine starts.
KEYLESSSTARTING
WARNINGSThe keyless starting systemmaynotfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such
as mobile phones.
Always check that the steeringwheel lock is deactivated beforeattempting to move your vehicle.
See Steeringwheel lock (page 135).
Note: A valid passive key must belocated inside the vehicle to switch theignition on and start the engine.
Note: To start your engine youmust alsofully depress the brake or clutch pedal,depending on the transmission fitted.
E85766
Ignition on
Press the start button once. All electricalcircuits are operational, warning lampsand indicators illuminate.
133
Starting the engine
Startingwith automatictransmission
Note: Releasing the brake pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.
1. Make sure the transmission is in P orN.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the start button.
Startingwithmanualtransmission
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Press the start button.
3. If the engine does not start, fullydepress the brake and clutch pedals.
Starting a diesel engine
Note: Engine cranking may notcommence until the engine glow plugcycle has been completed. Thismay takeseveral seconds in extremely coldconditions.
Note: Continue to press the clutch orbrake pedal until engine cranking begins.
Failure to start
The passive starting system will notfunction if:• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.
If you are unable to start your vehicle carryout the following procedure.
Type 1
E87382
1. Hold the key next to the steeringcolumn shroud exactly as shown.
2. With the key in this position you canuse the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.
Type2
E87381
1. Carefully prise out the cover.
134
Starting the engine
E85767
2. Insert the key into the key holder.
3. With the key in this position you canuse the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.
Stopping the enginewith thevehicle stationary
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators will beswitched off.
Manual transmission
Press the start button.
Automatic transmission
1. Move the selector lever to positionP.2. Press the start button.
Stopping the enginewhen thevehicle ismoving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering
assistance. The steering will not belocked, but higher effort will be required.When the ignition is switched off someelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators may also be OFF.
Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three timeswithin threeseconds.
STEERINGWHEEL LOCK
WARNING
Always check that the steering isunlocked before attempting tomove your vehicle.
Vehicleswithout keylessstarting
To activate the steering wheel lock;
1. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.
2. Turn the steering wheel.
Vehicleswith keyless starting
Note: The steering wheel lock will notactivate when the ignition is on or thevehicle is moving.
Your vehicle has an electronicallycontrolled steering wheel lock. Thisoperates automatically.
The steering wheel lock will activate aftera short period of time once you haveparked your vehicle and the passive keyis outside of the vehicle.
Deactivating the steeringwheellock
Switch the ignition on, or:
Vehicles with automatic transmission• Press the brake pedal.
Vehicles with manual transmission• Press the clutch pedal.
135
Starting the engine
STARTINGAPETROLENGINE
Note: You can only operate the starterfor a maximum of 30 seconds at a time.
Cold or hot engine
All vehicles
CAUTION
When the temperature is below-20ºC (-4ºF), switch the ignition onfor at least one second before
starting the engine. This will make surethat the maximum fuel pressure isestablished for starting the engine.
Vehicleswithmanual transmission
Note: Do not touch the acceleratorpedal.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. If the engine does not start, fullydepress the brake and clutch pedals.
Vehicleswith automatictransmission
Note: Do not touch the acceleratorpedal.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.
All vehicles
If the engine does not start within 15seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.
If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theFlooded engine procedure.
If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -25ºC(-13ºF), press the accelerator pedalbetween¼ to½of its travel and try again.
Flooded engine
Vehicleswithmanual transmission
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedaland hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Vehicleswith automatictransmission
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedaland hold it there.
3. Fully depress the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine.
All vehicles
If the engine does not start, repeat theCold or hot engine procedure.
Engineidlespeedafterstarting
The speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting will varydepending on the engine temperature.
If the engine is cold then the idle speedwill automatically be increased in order toheat the catalytic converter as quickly aspossible. This ensures that vehicleemissions are kept to an absoluteminimum.
The idle speedwill slowly decrease to thenormal level as the catalytic converterwarms up.
136
Starting the engine
STARTINGAPETROLENGINE - E85
For general information on starting apetrol engine. See Starting a petrolengine (page 136).
Starting at lowambienttemperatures
When the temperature is lower than -10°C(14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, anengine block heater should be used tofacilitate starting. See Engine heater(page 138). Failure to do this will result in anon start.
If the temperature is expected to remainbelow -10°C (14°F), it is recommendedthat you increase the proportion of petrolin the tank by topping up with 95 octaneunleaded petrol if the tank is not alreadyfull. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrolwill reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾full tank from 85% to 70% and willconsiderably improve cold start capability.
If, at very low temperatures, the tank isfilled with only E85 and there is no way touse an engine block heater, you mayexperience difficulties starting the engine.
If the engine fails to start, proceed asfollows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key to position III.
CAUTION
Release the ignition key as soon asthe engine has started.
3. Gradually release the acceleratorpedal after 5 seconds of enginecranking or as the engine speed rises.
If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1,2 and 3, or connect an engine blockheater for two hours before attemptinganother start.
During starting, the fuel injectors areturnedoff as long as the accelerator pedalis depressed. This can be used to drainexcessive fuel from the intake manifoldafter several unsuccessful startingattempts.
If the battery has been disconnected orafter the fuel type has been changed, theidle speed may be irregular. This willimprove after 10 to 30 seconds.
STARTINGADIESELENGINE
Cold or hot engine
All vehicles
Note:When the temperature is below-15ºC (5ºF), you may need to crank theengine for up to 25 seconds. If youconsistently operate the vehicle in suchtemperatures, we recommend that youhave an engine block heater fitted.
Note:Continue cranking the engine untilit starts.
Note: You can only operate the starterfor a maximum of 30 seconds at a time.
Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicatorgoes off.
Vehicleswithmanual transmission
Note: Do not touch the acceleratorpedal.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. If the engine does not start, fullydepress the brake and clutch pedals.
Vehicleswith automatictransmission
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
137
Starting the engine
3. Start the engine.
DIESELPARTICULATEFILTER (DPF)
The DPF forms part of the emissionsreduction systems fitted to your vehicle.It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot)from the exhaust gas.
Regeneration
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF
regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and theexhaust will radiate a considerableamount of heat during and after DPFregeneration, andafter youhave switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.
CAUTION
Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: After you have switched yourengine off the fans may continue to runfor a short period of time.
Unlike a normal filter which requiresperiodic replacement, the DPF has beendesigned to regenerate, or clean itself tomaintain operating efficiency. Theregeneration process takes placeautomatically. However, some drivingconditions mean that you may need tosupport the regeneration process.
If you drive only short distances or yourjourneys contain frequent stopping andstarting, where there is increasedacceleration and deceleration, occasionaltrips with the following conditions willassist the regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle at a constant speed,preferably on a main road ormotorway, for up to 20 minutes.
• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.
• Do not switch off the ignition.
• Use a lower gear than normal tomaintain a higher engine speedduringthis journey, where appropriate.
SWITCHINGOFF THEENGINE
Vehicleswith a turbocharger
CAUTION
Do not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do,the turbocharger will continue
running after the engine oil pressure hasdropped to zero. This will lead topremature turbocharger bearing wear.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed andthen switch it off.
ENGINEHEATER
CAUTION
Make sure youdisconnect thepowercable from the engine heaterconnector before driving away.
138
Starting the engine
Note: The engine heater connector islocated in the radiator grille at the front ofyour vehicle.
E97918
Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3hours before starting the engine.
139
Starting the engine
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
CAUTION
For vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly
the same specification as the original.
The system reduces fuel consumptionandCO2 emissions by shutting down theengine when the vehicle is idling, forexample at traffic lights. The engine willautomatically restart when the driverpresses the clutch pedal orwhen requiredby a vehicle system, for example torecharge the battery.
To obtain maximum benefit from thesystem,move thegear lever to the neutralposition and release the clutch pedalduring any stop of longer than 2 seconds.
USINGSTART-STOP
WARNINGSThe engine may restartautomatically if required by thesystem. See Principle of
operation (page 140).
Switch the ignition off beforeopening the bonnet or carrying outany maintenance.
Always switch the ignition off beforeleaving your vehicle, as the systemmay have shut down the engine but
the ignition will still be live.
Note: The system only operates whenthe engine is warm and the outsidetemperature is between 0ºC (32ºF) and30ºC (86ºF).
Note: The system is on by default. Toswitch the system off, press the switch inthe instrument panel. The systemwill onlybe de-activated for the current ignitioncycle. To turn it on, press the switch again.For item location. SeeQuickstart (page11).
Note: The Start-stop indicator willilluminate green when the engine shutsdown. SeeWarning lamps andindicators (page 80).Note: The Start-stop indicator will flashamber, requiring you to select neutral ordepress the clutch pedal. In conjunctiona message will be shown in the display.
Note: If the system detects amalfunction, it is deactivated. Have thesystem checked by a properly trainedtechnician.
Note: If you have switched the systemoff, the switch will be illuminated.
Note: If you stall the engine, and thendepress the clutch pedal within a coupleof seconds, the system will automaticallyrestart the engine.
To stop the engine
Note: The vehicle must be stationary.
Note: If the system does not shut downthe engine the condition will be shown inthe information display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the gear lever to the neutralposition.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The system may not shut down theengine under certain conditions, forexample:
• To maintain the interior climate.
• Low battery voltage.
140
Start-stop
• The outside temperature is too low ortoo high.
• The driver's door has been opened.
• Low engine operating temperature.
• Low brake system vacuum.
• If a road speed of 10 kph (6 mph) hasnot been exceeded.
To re-start the engine
Note: The gear lever must be in theneutral position.
Depress the clutch pedal.
The systemmay automatically restart theengine under certain conditions, forexample:
• Low battery voltage.
• To maintain the interior climate.
141
Start-stop
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The system assists the driver to drivemore efficiently by constantly monitoringcharacteristics of gear changing,anticipation of traffic conditions andspeeds on motorways and open roads.
Note: These efficiency values do notresult in a defined fuel consumption figure.It might vary as it is not only related tothese driving disciplines but alsoinfluenced bymany other factors such asshort journeys and cold starts.
Note: Frequent short journeys, wherethe engine does not fully warm up, willalso increase fuel consumption.
The value of these characteristics isrepresented by petals shown in thedisplay, with five petals being the mostefficient. The more efficiently you drive,the better the rating, and the better youroverall fuel consumption.
Type 1
E121813A B C
Gear shiftingA
AnticipationB
Efficient speedC
Gear shifting
Using the highest drivable gearappropriate for the road conditions willimprove fuel consumption.
Anticipation
Adjusting your vehicle speed and thedistance to other vehicles without theneed for heavy braking or accelerationwill improve fuel consumption.
Efficient speed
Higher speeds use more fuel. Reducingyour cruising speed on open roads willimprove fuel consumption.
Type2 and3
The relevant information will be shown inthe display.
USINGECOMODE
The system is accessedusing the relevantinformation display menu. SeeInformation displays (page 84).
Resetting Ecomode
Reset the average fuel consumption.
Note: New values may take a short timeto calculate.
142
Ecomode
FUELQUALITY - PETROL
CAUTION
Do not use leaded petrol or petrolwith additives containing othermetallic compounds (e.g.
manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.
Note:We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.
Useminimum95octane unleadedpetrol thatmeets the specification definedby EN228, or equivalent.
FUELQUALITY - E85
WARNINGSDo not modify the fuel systemconfiguration or the components inthe system.
Do not replace the fuel system orthe components with parts notspecially designed to be used with
E85.
CAUTIONSDo not use leaded petrol or petrolwith additives containing othermetallic compounds (e.g.
manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.
Do not usemethanol instead of E85.
Note:We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.
Note:When using E85, you mayexperience a higher fuel consumption.
Note: Your vehicle will operate well oncommercial quality 95 octane unleadedpetrol, but only high quality E85 offers thesame protection and performance.
Useminimum95octane unleadedpetrol thatmeets the specification definedby EN228, or equivalent. You can alsouse amixture of unleaded petrol and E85.
Long-termstorage
Due to small amounts of corrosiveimpurities that may be found in the E85,it is recommended that you fill the tankwith only 95 octane unleaded petrol priorto long-term storage of your vehicle.
FUELQUALITY - DIESEL
WARNING
Do not mix diesel with oil, petrol orother liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.
CAUTIONSDo not add kerosene, paraffin orpetrol to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.
Use diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN590, orthe relevant national specification.
Note:We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel.
Note: The use of additives or otherengine treatments not approved by Fordis not recommended.
Note:We do not recommend theprolonged use of additives intended toprevent fuel waxing.
143
Fuel and refuelling
Long-termstorage
Most diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it isrecommended to fill the tank with purelymineral diesel (where available) or add ananti-oxidant prior to long-term storage ofyour vehicle exceeding twomonths. Yourdealer can help you with a suitableanti-oxidant.
CATALYTICCONVERTER
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustiblematerials. The exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.
Drivingwith a catalyticconverter
CAUTIONSAvoid running out of fuel.
Do not crank the engine for longperiods.
Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.
Do not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeUsingboostercables (page228).
Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.
FUEL FILLER FLAP
WARNINGSTake care when refuelling to avoidspilling any residual fuel from the fuelnozzle.
WARNINGSDo not use any kind of flames orheat near the fuel system. The fuelsystem is under pressure. There is
a risk of injury if the fuel system is leaking.
CAUTION
If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuelfiller flap briefly from a distance not
less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).
Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap. See Lockingand unlocking (page 37).
E86613
Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.
When you insert the fuel nozzle, a springloaded inhibitor will open if the correct sizenozzle is detected. This will prevent fillingup with the wrong fuel.
WARNING
Stop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in
the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.
144
Fuel and refuelling
E119080
Insert the fuel nozzle up to and includingthe first notch on the nozzle. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel pipeopening.
WARNING
We recommend that you wait atleast 10 seconds before removingthe fuel nozzle to allow any residual
fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
E119081
Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.
A funnel is located in the sparewheel well.Use this when refilling with a fuel can.
REFUELLING
CAUTION
Do not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the
engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.
REFUELLING - E85
CAUTION
Do not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the
engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.
After refuelling, allow 5minutes of normalengine operation above 48 km/h (30mph) to reduce the risk of an increasedengine restart time.
FUELCONSUMPTION
The CO2 and fuel consumption figuresare derived from laboratory testsaccording to EECDirective 80/1268/EECand subsequent amendments and arecarried out by all vehicle manufacturers.
They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent thereal world fuel consumption you may getfrom your vehicle. Real world fuelconsumption is governedbymany factorsincluding; driving style, high speed driving,stop/start driving, air conditioning usage,the accessories fitted and towing etc.
Your Ford dealer can give you advice onimproving your fuel consumption.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS
145
Fuel and refuelling
4-door and5-door
Fuel consumption figures
CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban
Variant
g/kml/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
1707.2 (39.2)5.6 (50.4)10 (28.2)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage IV(92kW/125PS), 5-speedmanual transmission
1596.8 (41.5)5.4 (52.3)9.2 (30.7)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage V(88kW/120PS), 5-speedmanual transmission
1586.8 (41.5)5.5 (51.4)9.1 (31)1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)Stage V (118kW/160PS), 6-speedmanual transmission
1897.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (107kW/145PS)
1848 (35.3)6 (47.1)11.3 (25)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage V (107kW/145PS)
1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.7 (26.4)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)StageV (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion
1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.9 (26.4)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (176kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion
2239.3 (30.4)6.7 (42.2)13.8 (20.5)
2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (118kW/161PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion
1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (67.3)6 (47.1)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionwithout start-stop
146
Fuel and refuelling
CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban
Variant
g/kml/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
1144.3 (65.7)3.9 (72.4)5 (56.5)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop ECONETIC
1254.7 (60.1)4.2 (67.3)5.6 (50.4)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop
1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (58.9)7.5 (37.7)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV, 6-speedmanual transmission
1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedmanual transmission
1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionECONETIC
1877.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)9.7 (29.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(100kW/136PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission
1495.6 (50.4)4.7 (60.1)7.2 (39.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedautomatic transmission
1656.2 (45.6)4.9 (57.6)8.4 (33.6)
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(129kW/175PS), 6-speedmanual transmission
1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.8 (36.2)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (147kW/200PS)
147
Fuel and refuelling
Estate
Fuel consumption figures
CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban
Variant
g/kml/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
1707.2 (39.2)5.6 (50.4)10 (28.2)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage IV(92kW/125PS), 5-speedmanual transmission
1596.8 (41.5)5.4 (52.3)9.2 (30.7)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT(Sigma) Stage V(88kW/120PS), 5-speedmanual transmission
1586.8 (41.5)5.5 (51.4)9.1 (31)1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)Stage V (118kW/160PS), 6-speedmanual transmission
1897.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (107kW/145PS)
1848 (35.3)6 (47.1)11.3 (25)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage V (107kW/145PS)
1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.7 (26.4)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)StageV (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion
1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.9 (26.4)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (176kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion
2239.3 (30.4)6.7 (42.2)13.8 (20.5)2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)(118kW/161PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission
1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (67.3)6 (47.1)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionwithout start-stop
148
Fuel and refuelling
CO2emis-sionsCombinedExtra-urbanUrban
Variant
g/kml/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
l/100 km(mpg)
1144.3 (65.7)3.9 (72.4)5 (56.5)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop ECONETIC
1254.7 (60.1)4.2 (67.3)5.6 (50.4)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop
1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (58.9)7.5 (37.7)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV
1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedmanual transmission
1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionECONETIC
1877.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)9.7 (29.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(100kW/136PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission
1495.6 (50.4)4.7 (60.1)7.2 (39.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V, 6-speedautomatic transmission
1656.2 (45.6)4.9 (57.6)8.4 (33.6)
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(129kW/175PS), 6-speedmanual transmission
1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.8 (36.2)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (147kW/200PS)
149
Fuel and refuelling
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
CAUTION
Do not engage reverse gear whenthe vehicle ismoving. This can causedamage to the transmission.
E99067
On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.
AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION
Selector lever positions
E80836
S
ParkP
ReverseR
NeutralN
DriveD
Sportmode andmanual shiftingS
WARNING
Apply the brakes beforemoving theselector lever and keep themapplied until you are ready to move
off.
Note: A cold engine has a higher idlespeed. This will increase the tendency foryour vehicle to creep when you haveselected a drive gear.
Press the button on the selector lever toselect reverse and park.
The selector lever position will be shownin the information display.
Park
WARNINGSSelect park only when your vehicleis stationary.
Apply the parking brake andselect park before leavingyour vehicle. Make sure that the
selector lever is latched in position.
Note:An audiblewarningwill sound if youopen the driver's door and you have notselected park.
In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine withthe selector lever in this position.
Reverse
WARNING
Select reverse only when yourvehicle is stationary and the engineis at idle speed.
150
Transmission
Neutral
In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmissionis not locked. You can start the enginewith the selector lever in this position.
Drive
Select drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.
Sportmode andmanual shifting
2
1
E80837
S
S
Note: A shift will occur only when thevehicle speed and the engine speed areappropriate.
Note:When you select positionS, a gearchange may occur depending on theaccelerator pedal position in relation toactual vehicle speed.
Activate sport mode by moving theselector lever to position S. Sport modewill remain active until you shift manuallyup or down the gears.
Select manual shifting to shift manuallythrough the forward gears. Push theselector lever forwards to shift down andpull it backwards to shift up.
Drivemodes
The transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimumperformance based on ambienttemperature, road gradient, vehicle loadand driver input.
Hints on drivingwith anautomatic transmission
Moving off
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Release the brake pedal and pressthe accelerator pedal.
Stopping
1. Release the accelerator pedal andpress the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
Kickdown
Press the accelerator pedal fully with theselector lever in the drive position to selectthe next lowest gear for optimumperformance. Release the acceleratorpedal when you no longer requirekickdown.
Emergency park positionrelease lever
Use the lever to move the selector leverfrom the park position in the event of anelectricalmalfunction or if your vehicle hasa flat battery.
151
Transmission
E87934
1. Remove the centre console sidepanel.
E87935
Note: The lever is yellow.
1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver intothe slot and turn the screwdriverclockwise 90 degrees.
152
Transmission
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
Note:Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, the brakelamps may flash if you brake heavily.
Disc brakes
Wet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving froma carwash to remove the filmof water.
ABS
WARNING
The ABS does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
TheABShelps you tomaintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventingthe road wheels from locking.
HINTSONDRIVINGWITHABS
When the ABS is operating, the brakepedal will pulse. This is normal. Maintainpressure on the brake pedal.
The ABS will not eliminate the dangersinherent when:• you drive too close to the vehicle in
front of you.• the vehicle is aquaplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKINGBRAKE
Applying the parking brake
E66567
WARNING
Make sure that the parking brake isapplied before you release the lever.
Note: Do not press the release buttonwhen you apply the parking brake.
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards
to its fullest extent.
Parking on a hill
If you have to park facing uphill, select firstgear and turn the front wheels away fromthe kerb. If you have to park facingdownhill, select reverse gear and turn thefront wheels towards the kerb.
Releasing the parking brake
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards
slightly, press the release button andpush the lever downwards.
153
Brakes
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
Electronicstabilityprogramme(ESP)
WARNING
ESP does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.
E72903
A A
AB
B
B
B
without ESPA
with ESPB
The ESP supports stability when thevehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. This is performed bybraking individual wheels and reducingengine torque as needed.
The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if thewheels spinwhen youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.
Stabilitycontrol(ESP)warninglamp
The ESPwarning lampwill flash when thesystem is operating. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).
Emergency brake assist
WARNING
Emergency brake assist does notrelieve you of your responsibility todrive with due care and attention.
Emergency brake assist will detect whenyou brake heavily by measuring the rateat which you press the brake pedal. It willprovide maximum braking efficiency aslong as you press the pedal. Emergencybrake assist can reduce stoppingdistances in critical situations.
USINGSTABILITYCONTROL
Note: The system will be switched onautomatically every time you switch theignition on.
Vehicleswith stability control(ESP) switch
Press and hold the switch for one second.The switch will illuminate. A message willbe shown in the display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).
Press the switch again to turn the systemon.
For item location: SeeQuickstart (page11).
154
Stability control
Vehicleswithout stabilitycontrol (ESP) switch
Turn the system off and on using theinformation display. See Informationdisplays (page 84).
155
Stability control
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen the vehicle is on a slopewithout theneed to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, the vehiclewillremain stationary on the slope for a shorttime after you release the brake pedal.During this time, you have time to moveyour foot from the brake to theaccelerator pedal and pull away. Thebrakes are released automatically oncethe engine has developed sufficient driveto prevent the vehicle from rolling downthe slope. This is an advantage whenpulling away on a slope, for example froma car park ramp, traffic lights or whenreversing uphill into a parking space.
WARNING
The system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave thevehicle, always apply the parking
brake and select first or reverse gear.
USINGHILL STARTASSIST
The system can operate in eitherautomatic or manual mode. If you selectautomatic mode, the system is activatedautomatically when the vehicle is on aslope and you press the brake pedal. Ifyou select manual mode, you mustactivate the systemusing thebrakepedal.
To set the system mode:
E70499
E74629
AutoOff
Hill Launch
Manual
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownbuttons and press the right arrowbutton.
3. Highlight Hill Launch and press theright arrow button.
4. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.IfOff is selected, the system isswitched off and cannot be activatedeither automatically or manually.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.
156
Hill start assist
Note:When the system is in manualactivation mode, only use the systemwhen pulling away uphill on gradientsgreater than 3%. If the vehicle is on theflat or on a downhill slope, an activesystem will make it difficult to pull awaysmoothly.
Activating the system
WARNINGSYoumust remain in the vehicle onceyou have activated the system. Anyattempt to leave the vehicle will
deactivate the system automatically.
The system is active only if themessage Hill LaunchAssistactive is displayed in the
information display. During all times youare responsible for controlling the vehicle,supervising the system and intervening,if required.
You can activate the system only if thefollowing conditions have been met:
• The engine is running.
• The system is switched on (automaticor manual mode).
• The parking brake is fully disengaged.
• On vehicleswithmanual transmission,the clutch pedal is pressed.
• On vehicles with automatictransmission, the driver door is closed.
• No failure mode is present.
To activate the system in automaticmode:
1. Press the brake pedal to bring thevehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicleis on a slope and the right drivingdirection is selected (first gear if thevehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gearif the vehicle is pointing downhill), thesystemwill be activated automatically.Hill LaunchAssist active willappear in the display.
3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.
4. Pull away using the accelerator andclutch pedal. The brakes will bereleased automatically.
To activate the system in manual mode:
1. Press the brake pedal to bring thevehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.
2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further untilHill LaunchAssistactive appearsin the display. The system is nowactive.
3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.
4. Pull away using the accelerator andclutch pedal. The brakes will bereleased automatically.
WARNING
When the system is active and thesystemdetects a failure, the systemis deactivated and the message
Please use park brake! followed byHill LaunchA .not available will bedisplayed. The vehicle is still safe to bedriven and can be repaired during thenext service. The messageHill LaunchA. not available will also be displayedwith manual activation during a failure orif one of the activation criteria is not met.If you have switched the system off, nomessages will be displayed.
157
Hill start assist
Deactivating the system
To deactivate the system, perform oneof the following:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Wait for two to three seconds until thesystem deactivates automatically.
• If a forward gear was selected whenthe system became active, selectreverse gear.
• If reverse gearwas selectedwhen thesystem became active, select aforward gear.
HillLaunchAssistoffwill appear in theinstrument cluster display.
158
Hill start assist
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The active suspension provides improvedhandling, comfort and stability bycontinuously adjusting the damperproperties to the current road and drivingconditions. This system in conjunctionwiththe ABS system offers the benefit ofpotentially shorter stopping distances onrough road surfaces.
Depending on your preferences anddriving style, you can choose betweenthree different settings:
Comfort
This provides a softer driving feel.
Normal
Normal setting.
Sport
This provides a harder, sportier ride.
USINGACTIVESUSPENSION
Selecting a setting
Note:After you select a setting, youmaynot immediately notice a difference in thevehicle's handling. The effect of thecontinuously controlleddampingdependson the road surface and drivingconditions.
E70475
You can change the setting while driving.
Systemmalfunction
The active suspension system will switchoff automatically if it malfunctions. Thesuspension will be set to a fail-safecondition that will enable you to continuedriving but you will not be able to changethe suspension setting. Have this checkedas soon as possible.
159
Active suspension
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
WARNING
The parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.
CAUTIONSVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by usmay notcorrectly detect obstacles.
The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.
The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.
The parking aid does not detectobstacles moving away from thevehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move towardsthe vehicle again.
Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or rear fittedaccessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as
the rear parking aid will only indicate thedistance from thebumper to theobstacle.
If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not
less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).
Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ballarm, the parking aid is deactivatedautomatically when any trailer lamps (orlighting boards) are connected to the13-pin socket via a trailer tow module wehave approved.
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt,ice and snow. Do not clean with sharpobjects.
Note: The parking aid may emit falsetones if it detects a signal using the samefrequency as the sensors or if the vehicleis fully laden.
Note: The outer sensorsmay detect theside walls of a garage. If the distancebetween the outer sensor and the sidewall remains constant for three seconds,the tone will switch off. As you continue,the inner sensors will detect rearwardobjects.
USINGTHEPARKINGAID
Switching the parking aid onand off
Note: The parking aid switches offautomatically when you start the engineor when you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph).
Note: The front and rear sensors arealways activated or deactivated together.
The parking aid is per default off. Toswitch the parking aid on, press the switchin the instrument panel or select reversegear.
The light in the switch illuminates whenthe parking aid is activated.
To turn it off, press the switch again.
Manoeuvringwith the parkingaid
E72902
160
Parking aid
Note: If a high pitchwarning tone soundsfor three seconds and the light in theswitch is flashing, it indicates amalfunction. The system will be disabled.Have the system checked by properlytrained technicians.
You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of up to approximately 150centimetres (59 inches) between theobstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimetres(31 inches) between the obstacle andfront bumper and 50 centimetres (20inches) to the side. Decreasing thedistance accelerates the intermittent tone.A continuous tone will start at a distanceof less than 30 centimetres (12 inches).
You will hear an alternating tone from thefront and rear if obstacles are closer than30 centimetres (12 inches) to the frontand rear bumpers.
161
Parking aid
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
The camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.
WARNING
The camera does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
CAUTIONSIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thecamera briefly from a distance not
less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).
Do not apply pressure to the camera.
Note: Keep the camera free from dirt,ice and snow. Do not clean with sharpobjects, degreaser, wax or organicproducts. Use only a soft cloth.
During operation, guide lines appear inthe displaywhich represent your vehicle'spath and approximate distance fromrearward objects.
USINGTHEREARVIEWCAMERA
WARNINGSThe operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road
conditions.
The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.
Do not place objects in front of thecamera.
The camera is located on the luggagecompartment lid near the handle.
E99105
Activatingtherearviewcamera
CAUTION
The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to the vehicle.
With the ignition and the audio unitswitched on, engage reverse gear. Theimage is displayed on the screen.
The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:• Dark areas.
• Intense light.
• If the ambient temperature increasesor decreases rapidly.
• If the camera is wet, for example inrain or high humidity.
• If the camera's view is obstructed, forexample by mud.
Using the display
CAUTIONSObstacles above the camerapositionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.
162
Rear viewcamera
CAUTIONSMarks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles inmaximum loadconditions on aneven
road surface.
The lines show a projected vehicle path(based on the current steering wheelangle) and the distance from the exteriormirrors and rear bumper.
E99458
A
B
C
D E
A
B
C
D
Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1metre (4 inches)
A
Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches)B
Amber - 1 metre (39 inches)C
163
Rear viewcamera
Amber - 2 metres (79 inches)D
Amber - centre line of theprojected vehicle path
E
Note:When reversing with a trailer, thelines on the screen show the vehicledirection and not the trailer.
Deactivating the rear viewcamera
Note: Disengage reverse gear. Thedisplay will stay on for a short periodbefore switching off.
The system will automatically switch offonce the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 15 km/h (9 mph).
Vehicleswith parking aid
The display will additionally show acoloured distance bar. This guideindicates the distance from the rearbumper to the detected obstacle.
These are colour coded as follows:• Green - 0.8 to 1.5 metres (31 to 59
inches).• Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 metre (12 to 31
inches).• Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less.
164
Rear viewcamera
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
Cruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).
USINGCRUISECONTROL
WARNING
Do not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on twisty roads or when theroad surface is slippery.
Switching cruise control on
E70612
Setting a speed
E70615
Press the SET+ switch or the SET-switch to store andmaintain your currentspeed. The cruise control indicatorilluminates.
Changing the set speed
WARNING
When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The systemwill not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear and pressthe RES switch to assist the system inmaintaining the set speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release theaccelerator pedal, you will return to thespeed that you previously set.
Press the SET+ switch or the SET-switch to accelerate or decelerate.
Cancelling the set speed
E70614
Press the brake pedal or theCAN switch.The system will no longer control yourspeed. The cruise control indicator will gooff but the system will retain the speedthat you previously set.
165
Cruise control
Resuming the set speed
E70616
Press theRES switch. The cruise controlindicator illuminates and the system willattempt to resume the speed that youpreviously set.
Switching cruise control off
E70613
Press theOFF switch. The systemwill notretain the speed that you previously set.The cruise control indicator will go off.
166
Cruise control
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
WARNINGSThe system is not a collisionwarningor avoidance system. The separateforward alert function provides a
collision warning and mitigation feature.SeeForwardalertfunction (page 172).You must intervene if the system doesnot detect a vehicle in front.
When driving you are responsibleformaintaining the correct distanceand speed, even when adaptive
cruise control is used. You must alwayspay attention to the traffic conditions andintervene when adaptive cruise control isnot maintaining a suitable speed orsuitable distance.
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
The systemdoes not brake for slowor stationary vehicles, pedestrians,objects in the road, oncoming and
crossing vehicles.
CAUTIONSOnly use adaptive cruise controlwhen conditions are favourable, forexample on motorways and main
roads with steady free flowing traffic.
Do not use in poor visibility,specifically fog, heavy rain, spray orsnow.
Do not use on icy or slippery roads.
Donot use the systemwhenenteringor leaving a motorway.
The radar sensor has a limited fieldof vision. In some situations it maydetect a vehicle other than the one
expected or not detect any vehicle at all.
Note:When adaptive cruise control isactivated, you may hear some unusualsounds during automatic braking. This isnormal and caused by the automaticbraking system.
Note: Keep the front of the vehicle freefrom dirt, metal badges or objects,including vehicle front protectors andadditional lights which may prevent thesensor from operating.
The system is designed to help youmaintain a gap from the vehicle ahead ora set road speed if there is no slowervehicle ahead. The system is intended toprovide enhancedoperation of the vehiclewhen following other vehicles which arein the same lane and travelling in the samedirection.
The system is basedon the use of a radarsensor which projects a beam directlyforward of the vehicle. This beam willdetect any vehicle ahead within thesystem's range.
The radar sensor is mounted behind thefront grille.
167
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Detection beam issues
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
• With vehicles that edge into your lanethat can only be detected once theyhave moved fully into your lane (A).Motorcyclesmay be detected late, ornot at all. (B)
• With vehicles in front when going intoand coming out of a bend (C). Thedetection beam will not follow sharpcurves in the road.
In these cases the systemmay brake lateor unexpectedly. You should stay alertand intervene if necessary.
Automatic brakingwith ACC
WARNINGSYou must take immediate actiononce alerted, as the adaptive cruisecontrol braking will not be sufficient
to keep a safe distance to the vehicle infront.
In some cases there may be nowarning or the warning may bedelayed. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary.
When following a vehicle in front ofyou, adaptive cruise control will notautomatically decelerate to a stop.
The system will automatically brake foryou, if required to maintain the set gapbetween your vehicle and the onedetected in front. This braking capacity islimited to approximately 30% of the totalmanual braking capacity to ensuresmooth and comfortable cruising. If thecar needs to brakemore heavily than this,and you do not intervene by brakingmanually, an alarm will sound and awarning symbol will be displayed in thecluster.
USINGACC
The system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.
168
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Vehicleswithout speed limiter
E124908
A
C
E
D
B
ACC onA
ACC cancelB
ACC offC
ACC gap increaseD
ACC gap decreaseE
Vehicleswith speed limiter
E124909
A
C
E
D
B
ACC on/offA
ACC cancelB
Speed limiter on/offC
ACC gap increaseD
ACC gap decreaseE
Switching the systemon
Press switch A. The system is set tostandby mode.
Setting a speed
Note: The system must be in standbymode.
E133884
F
G
Set speed increaseF
Set speed decreaseG
Press switch F or switchG to select yourdesired cruise speed. The speed isdisplayed in the information display andstored as the set speed.
Changing the set speed
Note: Vehicle speed may be increasedand decreased at intervals of 5 km/h or5 mph.
Note: If the system does not react tothese changes the reason may be thatthe gap interval to the vehicle in frontprevents an increase in speed.
169
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
E133884
F
G
Press switch F to increase or switchG todecrease the set speed until the desiredset speed is shown in the informationdisplay. The vehicle speed will graduallychange to the selected speed.
Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1mph may be set by pressing switch H.
E133885
H
ACC resumeH
Setting the vehicle gap
CAUTION
Use the appropriate gap setting inaccordance with local trafficregulations.
Note: The gap setting is time dependantand therefore the distance willautomatically adjust with your speed. Forexample on a gap setting of four bars, thetime gap is 1.8 seconds. This will meanthat at a speed of 100 km/h (62mph), thedistance to the vehicle in front will bemaintained at 50 metres (164 feet).
Note: If the accelerator is depressed fora short period, for example whenovertaking, the system is temporarilydeactivated and then reactivated whenthe accelerator pedal is released. Amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay.
Note: The gap setting will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.
E82311
Thedistancebetween youand the vehicledetected in front is maintained by avariable setting. There are five stepswhichare represented by horizontal barsdisplayed in the information display. Onebar denotes the smallest gap and fivebars indicate the largest gap. These barsare shown empty when in standbymodeand filled when in active mode.
If no vehicle is detected in front, then onlyyour vehicle is displayed in the informationdisplay below the bars. The system willmaintain the set speed when conditionspermit. The set gap is maintained anddisplayed.
If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, thedisplay will show another vehicle abovethe horizontal bars:
170
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
E82312
This is a follow mode, and the system willaccelerate or decelerate as necessary tomaintain the set gap.
Press switch E to decrease the gap orswitch D to increase the gap. The gapselected will be represented by thenumber of bars in the display.
Note: The recommended gap setting isfour to five bars.
Temporarily deactivating thesystem
Note: The system is cancelled when thegear lever is moved to a neutral positionor if the accelerator pedal or clutch isdepressed for a long period of time
Press either the brake or switch B tocancel the system. The systemwill returnto standbymode allowing you full manualcontrol of the vehicle. The set speed andgap setting are retained in the memory.
To resume adaptive cruise control pressswitchH. The systemwill resumewith thepreviously set speed and vehicle gapsetting if conditions permit.
Switching the systemoff
Vehicleswithout speed limiter
Press switch C to turn the system off.
Note:When deactivating the system bypressing switch C, the stored speed isnot retained.
Vehicleswith speed limiter
Press switch A to turn the system off.
Note:When deactivating the system bypressing switch A, the stored speed isnot retained.
Automatic deactivation
Note: If the engine speed drops too low,amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay instructing you to change down agear (manual transmission only). If you donot follow this recommendation then thesystemwill go into automatic deactivationmode.
Note: The system will not operate if theelectronic stability programme (ESP) hasbeen manually switched off.
The system is dependent on various othersafety systems, for example ABS andESP. If any of these systems aremalfunctioning or reacting to anemergency, the system is automaticallydeactivated.
In the event of automatic deactivation asignal will sound and the message isdisplayed in the information display SeeInformationmessages (page 97).You must then intervene and adapt yourdriving and speed to vehicles in front.
An automatic deactivation can be due tothe:
• vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h(20 mph)
• wheels losing traction
• brake temperature is high, forexamplewhendrivingonmountainousor hilly roads
• engine speed is too low
• radar sensor is covered
• parking brake or electric parking brake(EPB) is applied.
171
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
FORWARDALERTFUNCTION
WARNINGSNever wait for a collision warning.When driving you are responsibleformaintaining the correct distance
and speed, even when the system isused.
The system will only react tovehicles in front travelling in thesame direction and will not react to
slow or stationary vehicles.
Never drive in a manner to provokethe system. The system is designedto assist in emergencies only.
CAUTIONSWarnings may be triggered late, beabsent or triggered unnecessarilydue to detection beam issues. See
Principle of operation (page 167).
The system uses the same radarsensors as adaptive cruise controland therefore has the same
limitations. SeePrincipleofoperation(page 167).
Note: The brake support system onlyreduces the collision speed if you brakeimmediately once alerted.
Note: If the brake pedal is depressedsufficiently quickly then braking isimplementedwith full brake function, evenif the force on the pedal is light.
Note:Brake support prepares the brakesystem for rapid braking and the brakesare applied gently, which may be noticedas a slight jerk.
Note: The collision alerts will only occurif the system is switched on, however thebrake support is always on and cannotbe turned off.
Note: The system may be used with orwithout the Adaptive cruise controlsystem being activated.
The system assists you by warning of therisk of a collision with a vehicle in front.
The systemalerts you bywarning chimesand a visual warning in the informationdisplay. See Informationmessages(page 97).
Brake support is activated to enable fullbraking effectiveness, and reduce theseverity of a collision with the vehicle infront.
Switching the systemon andoff
Note:When the system is switched off,a warning indicator will remain illuminatedin the information display. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).Note: The system status and settingswillremain unchanged during ignition cycles.
The system can be switched on and offusing the information display. SeeGeneral information (page 84).
Adjusting thewarningsensitivity
You may adjust the system warningsensitivity using the buttons on thesteering wheel. SeeGeneralinformation (page 84). This controlshow early the visual and audible warningis activated.
172
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
WARNING
When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The systemwill not apply the
brakes but a warning will be given.
The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.The set speed will become the effectivemaximum speed of the vehicle, but withthe option to temporarily exceed this limitif required.
USINGTHESPEEDLIMITER
The system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.
Press button A to switch the system onand off. The information display willprompt for a speed to be set.
Note: The set speed limit can beintentionally exceeded for a short periodif required, for example when overtaking.
E124874
A
B
Setting the speed limit
Use the cruise control switches to alterthe maximum speed setting.
E70615
Press the SET+ switch or the SET-switch to select your desired speed limit.The speed is indicated in the informationdisplay and stored as the set speed.
Press button B to cancel the limiter andplace it in standbymode. The informationdisplay will confirm deactivation byshowing the set speed crossed out.
E70616
Press the RES button to resume thelimiter. The information displaywill confirmthe system is active by showing the setspeed again.
Intentionally exceeding thespeed limit
Depress the accelerator hard close to thefull pedal travel and the limit willtemporarily deactivate. The system willreactivate once the vehicle speed dropsbelow the set speed.
173
Speed limiter
Systemwarnings
If the set limit is accidentally exceeded theinformation display will show the setspeed flashing together with an audiblewarning chime.
If the set limit is intentionally exceeded theinformation display will show the setspeed crossed out.
174
Speed limiter
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.
Take regular rest breaks as requiredand do not wait for the system towarn you if you feel tired.
Take rest breaks only where it issafe to do so.
Certain driving styles and behaviourmay result in the system issuing awarning even if you are not feeling
tired.
CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weatherconditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow, spray and large
contrasts in lighting can all influence thesensor.
The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.
The systemmay not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.
The system may not operate onroads with sharp bends or narrowlanes.
Do not carry out windscreen repairsin the immediate area surroundingthe sensor.
CAUTIONSIf your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us,the system may not function
correctly.
Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.
Note: The system is intended as a driveraid when driving on fast main roads andmotorways.
Note:The systemcalculates an alertnesslevel at vehicle speeds aboveapproximately 65 km/h (40 mph).
The system automatically monitors yourdriving behaviour using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is adeterioration in your driving, the systemwill alert you.
USINGDRIVERALERT
Switching the systemon andoff
Note: The system status will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.
Activate the systemusing the informationdisplay. See Information displays(page 84).
Once activated the system will calculateyour alertness level based upon yourdriving behaviour in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.
Systemwarnings
Note: The systemwill not issuewarningsbelow approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).
175
Driver alert
The warning system is in two stages. Atfirst the system issues a temporarywarning that a rest should be taken. Thismessagewill only appear for a short time.If a rest is not then taken a further warningmay be issued which will remain in theinformation display until cancelled.
PressOK on the steering wheel controlto remove the warning.
Systemdisplay
When active the system will runautomatically in the background and onlyissue warnings if required. You can viewthe status at any time using theinformation display.
Select Information then Driver Alertto show the status screen in theinformation display.
The alertness level is shown by six stepsas a coloured bar.
E131358
Alertness level is fine, no rest required.
E131359
Alertness level is critical, indicating that arest should be taken as soon as safelypossible.
The status bar will travel from left to rightas the calculated alertness leveldecreases. As the rest icon is approachedthe colour turns from green to yellow andthen finally red when a rest break mustbe taken.
• Green - No rest required.
• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.
• Red - Second warning.
Note: The alertness level will be shownin grey if the camera sensor cannot trackthe road lane markings or if the vehiclespeed drops below approximately 65km/h (40 mph).
Resetting the system
You can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and thenopeningand closing the driver's door.
176
Driver alert
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.
Lane markings may not always beproperly tracked by the sensor.Other structures or objects may
sometimes be incorrectly detected as alanemarking, resulting in a false ormissedwarning.
CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weatherconditions the system may notfunction. Rain, snow, spray and large
contrasts in lighting can all influence thesensor.
The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.
The systemmay not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.
The system may not operate onroads with sharp bends or narrowlanes.
Do not carry out windscreen repairsin the immediate area surroundingthe sensor.
If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us,the system may not function
correctly.
Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings,insects and snow or ice.
Note: The system is intended as a driveraid when driving on fast main roads andmotorways.
Note: The system may not operateduring hard braking or acceleration and,when you are intentionally steering thevehicle.
Note: The system will operate with aminimum of one tracked lane marking.
Note:The systemwill only operate abovevehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h(40 mph).
A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to alert you of unintentionallane drifting at high speeds.
The system will automatically detect andtrack the lane markings on the road. If itdetects that the vehicle is unintentionallydrifting towards the lane boundaries thena visual warning will be displayed in theinformation display. There is also awarning given in the form of a vibrationfelt through the steering wheel.
USINGLANEDEPARTUREWARNING
Switching the systemon andoff
Note:When the system is switched off,a warning indicator will remain illuminatedin the information display. SeeWarninglamps and indicators (page 80).Note: The system status and settingswillremain unchanged during ignition cycles.
177
Lane departurewarning
E131360
A
B
System onA
System offB
Activate the system using the switcheson the indicator stalk.
Setting the steeringwheelvibration level
The system has three intensity levelswhich can be set using the informationdisplay. SeeGeneral information(page 84).
Setting the systemsensitivity
You can adjust how quickly the systemwarns you of a dangerous situation. Thesystem has two sensitivity levels whichcan be set using the information display.SeeGeneral information (page 84).
Systemwarnings
E131363
A column of lane markings is displayedeither side of the vehicle graphic.
The lane markings are colour coded asfollows:• Green - The system is ready to warn
you of any unintentional lanedeparture.
• Red - The vehicle is approaching or istoo close to the detected laneboundary. Take immediate safe actionto reposition the vehicle.
• Grey - The relevant lane boundary willbe suppressed.
Instanceswhere a lane boundarymay besuppressed:• Lane markings on the road may not
be detected by the sensor.• The direction indicator for that side of
the vehicle is on.• During hard acceleration and braking,
or if direct steering is applied.• Vehicle speed is outside the operating
limits• If there is an ABS or Stability Control
(ESP) intervention.• Narrow lane width.
If the lanemarkings turn red or a vibrationis felt through the steering wheel youmust take immediate and safe action toalign the vehicle and correct anyunintended lane drift.
178
Lane departurewarning
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.
Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.
Place luggage and other loads aslow and as far forward as possiblewithin the luggage or loadspace.
Do not drive with the tailgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes mayenter the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.SeeVehicle identification (page
244).
Heavy loads, when placed in thepassenger compartment, should beon folded rear seats as shown. See
Rear seats (page 124).
CAUTIONSDonot allow items to contact the rearwindows.
Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rearwindows.
Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.
E97377
LUGGAGEANCHORPOINTS
Estate
E86912
179
Load carrying
4-door and5-door
E86913
SLIDINGLOADSPACEFLOOR
WARNING
Do not slide the loadspace floorrearwards when the vehicle isstanding on an incline of 15 degrees
or more and facing uphill.
CAUTION
Themaximumpermissibleweight onthe sliding loadspace floor is 200kilogrammes (441 pounds).
The maximum permissible weight on theend of the sliding loadspace floor whenthe floor is in the fully extended position(slid outside the luggage compartment)is 120 kilogrammes (265 pounds).
E74810
Press the unlocking handle and pull theloadspace floor rearwards. It will stop andengage at a midway position.
E74811
To slide it out fully, press the unlockinghandle again and pull it out until it engagesin the end position.
To slide it forwards, press the unlockinghandle and push it forwards.
Note: You do not have to exert as muchpressure on the unlocking handle if youpush the loadspace floor forwards slightlywhen operating it.
180
Load carrying
Storage compartment
A storage compartment is located in thefloor at the rear of the luggagecompartment.
To gain access to the storagecompartment, lift up the sliding loadspacefloor as follows:
E74812
1
2
E74813
3
1. Press the unlocking handle and pullthe loadspace floor rearwards a shortway.
2. Lift up the rear of the floor (1).3. Push the floor forwards until it
engages at the front (2).4. Release the support leg from the clip
on the underside of the floor.5. Insert the end into the square retainer
in the left-hand rail (3).6. Lift the storage compartment cover
using the loop.
To return the loadspace floor to thenormal position:
1. Hold the floor with one hand andrelease the support leg with the otherhand.
2. Insert the support leg back into theclip.
181
Load carrying
3. Lower the floor.4. Press the unlocking handle and pull
the loadspace floor rearwards until itdrops into position on the rails.
REARUNDERFLOORSTORAGE
Vehicleswith a slidingloadspace floor
Raise the loadspace floor to gain accessto the storage compartment. SeeSliding loadspace floor (page 180).
Vehicleswithout a slidingloadspace floor
E87689
LUGGAGECOVERS
WARNING
Donot place objects on the luggagecover.
E112571
Pull out the cover until it locks.
E112572
Release it from the retaining points bypressing below the handle. Let it roll slowlyback into the case.
182
Load carrying
E112588
To remove or install the cover, push eitherend of the case inwards.
Stowing the luggage cover -Estatewithout full size sparewheel
E134798
Space is provided under the luggagecompartment floor.
CARGONETS
Luggage retention net
Installing the net
E87052
1. Push the ends of the upper bartowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.
E87053
2. Attach the net to the luggage anchorpoints. See Luggage anchorpoints (page 179).
183
Load carrying
E87054
3. Tighten the belts.
Removing the net
E87135
1. Release the belts.
2. Remove the net from the luggageanchor points.
3. Remove the upper bars.
ROOFRACKSANDLOADCARRIERS
Roof rack
WARNINGSIf you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience
different driving characteristics.
Read and follow themanufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting aroof rack.
CAUTION
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible roof load of 75kilogrammes (165 pounds) (including
the roof rack).
Check the security of the roof rack andtighten its fittings as follows:
• before starting
• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)
• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)intervals.
Tominimisewindnoisewhen the roof rackis not in use, cross rails should be movedrearwards and placed together. Toreduce fuel consumption, cross railsshould be removed when not in use.
DOGGUARD
CAUTION
Keep a distance of at least onecentimetre between the dog guardand the seats in front of it.
184
Load carrying
Installingbehindthefrontseats
E86848
1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.
E87782
2. Attach the dog guard to the loweranchor points. Do not tighten thescrews.
E87783
3. Attach the grille to the lower bar withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.
4. Tighten the screws at the loweranchor points.
5. Tighten the handwheels.
Installingbehindtherearseats
E86848
185
Load carrying
1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.
E104424
2. Remove two screws from both theluggageanchorpoints. SeeLuggageanchor points (page 179).
3. Attach the lower bar to the grille withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.
4. Attach the dog guard lower bar to theluggage anchor points, secure withthe new supplied screws.
5. Tighten the handwheels.
Remove in the reverse order.
LOADRETAININGFIXTURES
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 60 kilogrammes(132 pounds) on two load retaining
fixtures and 30 kilogrammes (66 pounds)on one.
Check the security of the load retainingfixtures and tighten its fittings as follows:
• before starting
• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)
• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)intervals.
Installing the load retainingfixtures
E75003
186
Load carrying
Installing the load bracket
WARNINGSInstall the load bracket with thelongest section towards the rear ofthe vehicle. If you install it the wrong
way round, it may not hold the box inplace in the event of an accident.
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 20 kilogrammes(44 pounds).
1
23 3
E76378
1. Turn the box over.
2. Position the load bracket.
3. Secure the load bracket with fourscrews.
E76379
4. Slide the captured bolts onto the loadretaining fixture.
E76380
5. Secure the load bracket with the twowing nuts.
6. Remove in the reverse order.
187
Load carrying
TOWINGATRAILER
WARNINGSDo not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).
The rear tyre pressures must beincreased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) abovespecification. See Technical
specifications (page 240).
Do not exceed themaximumgrosstrain weight stated on the vehicleidentification plate. See Vehicle
identification (page 244).
CAUTION
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, i.e. verticalweight on the tow ball, of 90
kilogrammes (198 pounds).
Note: Not all vehicles are suitable orapproved to have tow bars fitted. Checkwith your dealer first.
Place loads as low and central to theaxle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you aretowing with an unladen vehicle, the loadin the trailer should be placed toward thenose, within the maximum nose load, asthis gives the best stability.
The stability of the vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependant onthe quality of the trailer.
In high altitude regions above 1 000metres (3 281 feet), the stipulatedmaximum permitted gross train weightmust be reduced by 10% for everyadditional 1 000 metres (3 281 feet).
Steep gradients
WARNING
The overrun brake on a trailer is notcontrolled by ABS.
Change down a gear before you reach asteep downhill gradient.
DETACHABLE TOWBALL
WARNINGSWhen not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.
Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on
this.
Do not use any tools for mountingor dismounting the tow ball arm. Donot modify the trailer coupling. Do
not disassemble or repair the towball arm.
E71328
A 13-pin trailer socket and the towball armseat are provided underneath the rearbumper. Turn the trailer socket downthrough 90 degrees until it engages in theend position.
188
Towing
Unlocking the towball armmechanism
E713292
1
3
1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insertthe key and turn it clockwise to unlock(2).
2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out and turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks (3).
3. The redmark on the handwheel mustalign with the green mark on the towball.
4. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is unlocked.
Inserting the towball arm
1
2E71330
WARNING
The tow ball arm may only beinsertedwhencompletely unlocked.
1. Pull out the plug.2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and
press it upwards until it engages (1).Do not hold your hand near thehandwheel.
3. The green mark on the handwheelmust alignwith the greenmark on thetow ball.
4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwiseand remove the key (2).
5. Pull the protecting cap from the keybow and press it onto the lock.
189
Towing
Drivingwith a trailer
E71331
A
B
WARNING
If any of the below conditionscannot be met, do not use the towbar and have it checked by a
properly trained technician.
Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check:
• the green marks are aligned.
• the handwheel (A) is correctly fittedto the tow ball arm.
• you have removed the key (B).• the towball arm is securely positioned.
It must not move when jerked.
Removing the towball arm
3
1E71332
2
1. Unhitch the trailer.2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the
cap into the key bow. Insert the keyand unlock (1).
3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out, turn it clockwiseagainst the stop (2) and remove thetow ball arm (3).
4. Release the handwheel.
When unlocked in this way, the tow ballarm can be reinserted at any time.
190
Towing
Drivingwithout a trailer
E94771
1
1. Remove the tow ball arm.2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).
WARNING
Never unlock the tow ball arm withthe trailer attached.
Maintenance
CAUTION
Remove the towball armandprotectthe seat with the plug before steamcleaning your vehicle.
Keep the system clean. Periodicallylubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, andlocking balls with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.
Keep a note of the key number. In caseof loss, replacement keys are availablefrom the manufacturer by stating the4-digit key number.
191
Towing
RUNNING-IN
Tyres
WARNING
New tyres need to be run-in forapproximately 500 kilometres (300miles). During this time, you may
experience different drivingcharacteristics.
Brakes and clutch
WARNING
Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 150kilometres (100 miles) in town and
for the first 1 500 kilometres (1 000 miles)on motorways.
Engine
CAUTION
Avoid driving too fast during the first1 500 kilometres (1 000 miles). Varyyour speed frequently and change
up through the gears early. Do not labourthe engine.
GENERALDRIVINGPOINTS- VEHICLESWITH: SPORTSSUSPENSION
The distance between the underside ofyour vehicle and the ground is reducedcompared to other models. Drive withextreme care to avoid damage to yourvehicle.
COLDWEATHERPRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of somecomponents and systems can beaffected at temperatures below -30°C(-22°F).
DRIVINGTHROUGHWATER
Driving throughwater
CAUTIONSDrive throughwater in an emergencyonly, and not as part of normaldriving.
Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.
In an emergency, the vehicle can bedriven throughwater to amaximumdepthof 200 mm and at a maximum speed of10 km/h (6mph). Extra caution should beexercised when driving through flowingwater.
When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop the vehicle. Afterdriving through water, and as soon as itis safe to do so:• Depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function isachieved.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the vehicle's lights are fullyoperational.
• Check the power assistanceof the steering system.
192
Driving hints
FIRSTAIDKIT
Space is provided in the luggagecompartment.
4-door
E87654
5-door
E87655
Estate
E87656
WARNINGTRIANGLE
4-door and5-door
E87657
Space is provided in the luggagecompartment.
Estate and vehicleswith tyrerepair kit
Space is provided under the carpet.
See Rear under floor storage (page182).
193
Emergency equipment
FUSEBOXLOCATIONS
Engine compartment fuse box
E72588
Central fuse box
All vehicles
E72589
1. Pinch the retaining clips to release thecover.
E72590
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the knob through 90 degrees andrelease the fuse box from the retainingbracket.
4. Lower the fuse box cover and pull ittowards you.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Rear fuse box - 4-door and5-door
1
E87481
1. Remove the cover.
194
Fuses
2
E87482
2. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.
Rear fuse box - Estate
1
2
E87479
1. Release the catches.
2. Remove the cover.
3
3
3
E87480
3. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.
CHANGINGAFUSE
WARNINGSDo not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and
the replacement of relays andhigh currentfuses carried out by a properly trainedtechnician.
Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before touching orattempting to change a fuse.
CAUTION
Fit a replacement fusewith the samerating as the one you have removed.
Note: You can identify a blown fuse bya break in the filament.
Note: All fuses, except high currentfuses, are a push fit.
Note: A fuse puller is located in theengine compartment fuse box.
195
Fuses
FUSESPECIFICATIONCHART
Engine compartment fuse box
E75525
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Transmission control module (AWF21)10F1
Transmission control module (MPS6)15F1
196
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines)5F2
Vaporiser glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCiStage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F2
Engine cooling fan - twin fan (2.3L Duratec-HE and2.2L Duratorq-TDCi automatic)701F3
Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) (1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi)
801F3
Glow plugs60F4
Engine cooling fan (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi manual, 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCTStage V, 2.0L Duratec-HE, 2.3L Duratec-HE, 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi)
60F5
Engine cooling fan - twin fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)70F5
HEGO sensor (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)7.5F6
HEGOsensors 1, CMSsensor,Oxygen sensor (enginemanagement)10F6
Vaporiser glow plug (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V,2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F6
Relay coils5F7
Powertrain control module, Fuel metering unit, MAFsensor, fuel rail pressure control valve (enginemanagement).
10F8
Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F8
Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)15F8
MAF Sensor, Fuel Injectors, Variable Intake Valve,Variable Exhaust Valve, ignition coils (enginemanagement).
10F9
Fuel pump vaporiser (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F9
197
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
MAFSensor, EGRbypass Valve , Fuel pump vaporiser(2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (enginemanagement)7.5F9
Degas valve, TMAF sensor, active grille shutter,bypass valve, relay coil, auxiliary run on, water pump(1.6L EcoBoost SCTi).
7.5F9
Engine control module (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V)10F10
Auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)7.5F10
PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, SonicPurge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve,EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine manage-ment). T.MAF sensor, variable exhaust timing valve,active grille shutter, cannister purge valve, turbocontrol valve,wastegate valve (enginemanagement).
10F11
Turbo control valve, MAF sensor, active grille shutter,EGR valve, VCV valve (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)10F11
MAF sensor,Water in Fuel Sensor, Active grille shutter,inlet metering valve (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V).5F11
Fuel rail pressure, fuel metering unit, fuel pumpvaporiser, active grille shutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCiStage V)
7.5F11
Waste gate valve, variable intake timing valve, variableexhaust timing valve, cannister purge valve, vacuumsolenoid valve (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi).
7.5F11
Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoostSCTi)15F12
Coil on Plug; Canister Purge Valve, Power SteeringPressure Switch (engine management)10F12
EGR throttle, variable turbo control (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F12
Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)5F12
Air conditioning15F13
Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)15F14
198
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
HEGO sensor (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F14
Starter relay40F15
Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC)80F16
Central fuse box supply A60F17
Central fuse box supply B60F18
Rear fuse box supply C60F19
Rear fuse box supply D60F20
VQM/non VQM: Cluster/Audio/AC/FLR30F21
Windscreen wiper module30F22
Heated rear window30F23
Headlamp washer30F24
ABS valves30F25
ABS pump40F26
Fuel fired heater25F27
Heater blower40F28
Not used–F29
ABS 30 feed5F30
Horn15F31
Fuel fired heater - remote control5F32
Light switch module, engine compartment fuse boxcoils5F33
Heated windscreen (left-hand side)40F34
Heated windscreen (right-hand side)40F35
Rear wiper 15 feed15F36
Heated front washer jets/FLR + FSM KL157.5F37
PCM/TCM/EHPAS 15 feed10F38
Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)15F39
199
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Headlamp levelling / AFS module5F40
Instrument panel20F41
Cluster IP5F42
Audio/BVC module15F43
Automatic AC / Manual AC5F44
FLR (Start Stop)5F45
1Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.
200
Fuses
Central fuse box
E124888
A B
Left-hand driveA
Right-hand driveB
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Steering wheel module7.5F1
Spare IP 30 Feed5F2
Interior lamps10F3
Engine immobiliser5F4
201
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)7.5F5
Rain sensor5F6
Cigar lighter20F7
Fuel filler flap unlock supply10F8
Windscreen washers - rear15F9
Windscreen washers - front15F10
Luggage compartment release supply10F11
Fuel filler flap lock supply10F12
Fuel pump20F13
Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)7.5F13
Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor5F14
Ignition switch5F15
Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II(board computer diagnostics)5F16
Steering wheel vibration actuator5F17
SRS (airbag) supply10F18
ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake(EPB), accelerator pedal supply7.5F19
Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimmingmirror,lane departure warning7.5F20
Spare IP 30 Feed15F21
Brake lamp switch5F22
Sunroof20F23
Spare IP 30 Feed5F24
202
Fuses
Rear fuse box
4-door and5-door
E87483
203
Fuses
Estate
E75526
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA1
Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA2
Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA3
204
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA4
Rear locking (without rear door modules)10FA5
Auxiliary power socket15FA6
Relay coils5FA7
Keyless vehicle module20FA8
Relay coils VQM (Start Stop)5FA9
Not used-FA10
Accessories, trailer module20FA11
Electric driver's seat30FA12
Not used-FB1
Suspension module15FB2
Heated driver's seat15FB3
Heated front passenger seat15FB4
Left-hand rear heated seat15FB5
Not used-FB6
Right-hand rear heated seat15FB7
Parking aid, BLIS5FB8
Electric front passenger seat30FB9
Anti-theft alarm horn10FB10
Not used–FB11
Not used–FB12
Not used-FC1
Not used-FC2
Not used-FC3
Not used-FC4
Keyless vehicle20FC5
205
Fuses
Circuits protectedAmpereratingFuse
Not used-FC6
Seat memory function module5FC7
Rear seat entertainment/CD Changer7.5FC8
Audio amplifier20FC9
Sony audio system10FC10
Not used–FC11
Not used–FC12
206
Fuses
TOWINGPOINTS
Towing eye location
The screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.
The towing eye must always be carriedin the vehicle.
Installing the towing eye
CAUTION
The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make
sure that the towing eye is fully tightened.
Front towing eye
E87280
Rear towing eye
E87282
Insert your finger into the hole on theunderside of the cover and prise off thecover. Install the towing eye.
TOWINGTHEVEHICLEONFOURWHEELS
All vehicles
WARNINGSSwitch the ignition on when yourvehicle is being towed. The steeringlock will engage and the direction
indicators and brake lamps will not workif you do not.
The brake and steering assistancewill not operate unless the engine isrunning. Press the brake pedal
harder and allow for increased stoppingdistances and heavier steering.
CAUTIONSToo much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.
Do not use a rigid tow bar on thefront towing eye.
207
Vehicle recovery
CAUTIONSSelect neutral when your vehicle isbeing towed.
Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle that is towing.
Vehicleswith automatictransmission
CAUTIONSIf a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) anda distance of 20 kilometres (12miles)is to be exceeded the drive wheels
must be lifted clear of the ground.
It is recommended not to tow withthe drive wheels on the ground.However, if it is required to move the
vehicle from a dangerous location, do nottow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h (12mph) or further than 20 kilometres (12miles).
Do not tow your vehicle backwards.
In the event of a mechanical failureof the transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.
Do not tow your vehicle if theambient temperature is below 0ºC(32ºF).
208
Vehicle recovery
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly tohelp maintain its roadworthiness andresale value. There is a large network ofFord Authorised Repairers that are thereto help you with their professionalservicing expertise. We believe that theirspecially trained technicians are bestqualified to service your vehicle properlyand expertly. They are supported by awide range of highly specialised toolsdeveloped specifically for servicing yourvehicle.
In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing additional checks.
WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.
Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you haveswitched the ignition on orwhen the
engine is running. The system operatesat high voltage.
Keep your hands and clothing clearof the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may
continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.
CAUTION
When carrying out maintenancechecks,make sure that filler caps arefitted securely.
Daily checks
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Checkwhen refuelling
• Engine oil level. See Engine oilcheck (page 221).
• Brake fluid level. See Brake andclutch fluid check (page 222).
• Washer fluid level. SeeWasherfluidcheck (page 223).
• Tyre pressures (when cold). SeeTechnical specifications (page240).
• Tyre condition. SeeTyrecare (page238).
Monthly checks
• Engine coolant level (engine cold).See Engine coolant check (page221).
• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
• Power steering fluid level. SeePowersteeringfluidcheck (page222).
• Air conditioning operation.
• Parking brake operation.
• Horn operation.
• Tightness of wheel nuts. SeeTechnical specifications (page240).
209
Maintenance
OPENINGANDCLOSINGTHEBONNET
Opening the bonnet
E73698
E87785
Raise the bonnet slightly and move thecatch towards the left-hand side of thevehicle.
E87786
Open the bonnet and support it with thestrut.
Closing the bonnet
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is closedproperly.
Lower the bonnet and allow it to dropfrom under its own weight for the last20 – 30 centimetres (8 - 11 inches).
210
Maintenance
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 1.6LDURATEC-16VTI-VCT (SIGMA)
A C
GJ F
D EB
HIE87714
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).E
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
211
Maintenance
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW-1.6LECOBOOSTSCTI(SIGMA)
E132430
A
J I G FH
B C D E
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).E
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
212
Maintenance
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.0LDURATEC-HE(MI4)
A C
GJ F
D EB
HIE73231
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery. See Using booster cables (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 196).E
213
Maintenance
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW-2.0LECOBOOSTSCTI(MI4)
A C
GHJ I F
D EB
E124921
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery. See Using booster cables (page 228).D
214
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 196).E
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.3LDURATEC-HE(MI4)
E81313
A C
GJ F
D EB
HI
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
215
Maintenance
Battery. See Using booster cables (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 196).E
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW-1.6LDURATORQ-TDCI(DV) DIESEL
A
J I G FH
B C D E
E135199
216
Maintenance
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).E
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.0LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL
A C
GJ I F
D EB
HE73234
217
Maintenance
A C
GHJ I F
D EB
E124913
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery. See Using booster cables (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box. SeeFusespecificationchart (page 196).E
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir. SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
218
Maintenance
ENGINECOMPARTMENTOVERVIEW - 2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL
A C
GJ F
D EB
HIE87715
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
A
Engine oil filler cap1: See Engine oil check (page 221).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and clutchfluid check (page 222).
C
Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 228).D
Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 194).E
Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.F
Screen washer fluid reservoir: SeeWasher fluid check (page 223).G
Engine oil dipstick1: See Engine oil check (page 221).H
Power steering fluid reservoir: See Power steering fluid check (page222).
I
Engine coolant reservoir: See Engine coolant check (page 221).J1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.
219
Maintenance
ENGINEOILDIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATEC-16V TI-VCT(SIGMA)
E95540
BA
MINA
MAXB
ENGINEOILDIPSTICK - 1.6LECOBOOSTSCTI (SIGMA)
A B
E134114
MINA
MAXB
ENGINEOILDIPSTICK-2.0LDURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3LDURATEC-HE (MI4)
E92036
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINEOILDIPSTICK-2.0LECOBOOSTSCTI (MI4)
E124917
A B
E134040
A B
MINA
MAXB
220
Maintenance
ENGINEOILDIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATORQ-TDCI (DV)DIESEL/2.0LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL/2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW)DIESEL
E95543
BA
MINA
MAXB
ENGINEOILCHECK
CAUTION
Do not use oil additives or otherengine treatments. Under certainconditions, they could damage the
engine.
Note: The oil consumption of newengines reaches its normal level afterapproximately 5 000 kilometres (3 000miles).
Checking the oil level
CAUTION
Make sure that the level is betweentheMIN and theMAXmarks.
Note:Check the level before starting theengine.
Note:Make sure that your vehicle is onlevel ground.
Note:Oil expandswhen it is hot. The levelmay therefore extend a few millimetresbeyond theMAXmark.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with aclean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstickand remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at theMINmark, top upimmediately.
Topping up
WARNINGSOnly top upwhen the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.
Remove the filler cap.
CAUTION
Do not top up further than theMAXmark.
Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 223).
Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feela strong resistance.
ENGINECOOLANTCHECK
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinsethe affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
221
Maintenance
CAUTION
Make sure that the level is betweentheMIN and theMAXmarks.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot.The level may therefore extend beyondtheMAXmark.
If the level is at theMINmark, top upimmediately.
Topping up
WARNINGSOnly top upwhen the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.
Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot.Wait for the engineto cool down.
Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.
CAUTIONSIn an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reacha vehicle service station. Have the
system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.
Prolonged use of incorrect dilution ofthe coolant can cause enginedamage fromcorrosion, overheating
or freezing.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressurewill escape slowly as you unscrew thecap.
CAUTION
Do not top up further than theMAXmark.
Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolantand water using fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 223).
BRAKEANDCLUTCHFLUIDCHECK
WARNINGSDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinsethe affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
If the level is at theMINmark, havethe system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as
possible.
Note: Contamination with dirt, water,petroleum products or other materialsmay result in brake failure or costly repairs.
Note: The brake and the clutch systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.
Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 223).
POWERSTEERINGFLUIDCHECK
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinsethe affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
CAUTION
Make sure that the level is betweentheMIN and theMAXmarks.
If the level is at theMINmark, top upimmediately.
222
Maintenance
Topping up
Remove the filler cap.
CAUTION
Do not top up further than theMAXmark.
Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See Technicalspecifications (page 223).
WASHERFLUIDCHECK
Note: The front and rearwasher systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.
When topping up, use a mixture ofwasher fluid and water to help preventfreezing in cold weather and improve thecleaning capability. We recommend thatyou use only high quality washer fluid.
For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle fluids
CAUTION
Do not use fluids which do not meet the specifications or requirements defined.Use of unsuitable fluidsmay lead to damagewhich is not covered by yourWarranty.
Recommended fluidSpecificationItem
Castrol or Ford Engine OilWSS-M2C913-CEngine oil
Ford Power Steering FluidWSS-M2C204-A2Power steering fluid
Ford or Motorcraft Anti-freeze Super Plus Premium
WSS-M97B44-DCoolant
Ford Super DOT 4 BrakeFluid
WSS-M6C57-A2Brake fluid
Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, whichgives a fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.
Toppinguptheoil: If you are unable to find an oil thatmeets the specification definedbyWSS-M2C913-C, youmust useSAE5W-30 thatmeets the specification definedby ACEAA5/B5.
Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.
Castrol engine oil recommended.
223
Maintenance
E115472
Capacities
Capacity in litres(gallons)ItemVariant
MAX markPower steering systemAll
3.8 (0.8)Windscreen and rearwindow washer systemAll
70 (15.4)Fuel tankAll
4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
6 (1.3)Engine cooling system1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT
4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)
3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)
6.5 (1.4)Engine cooling system1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)
4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE
3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE
6.2 (1.4)Engine cooling system2.0L Duratec-HE
5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
5.1 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
approx. 6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.0L EcoBoost SCTi
4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE
224
Maintenance
Capacity in litres(gallons)ItemVariant
3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE
6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.3L Duratec-HE
3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
3.5 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
7.3 (1.6)Engine cooling system1.6L Duratorq-TDCi
5.5 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
5 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
8.1 (1.8)Engine cooling system2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
6 (1.3)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
8.4 (1.9)Engine cooling system2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
225
Maintenance
CLEANINGTHEEXTERIOR
WARNING
If you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you removethe wax from the windscreen.
CAUTIONSPrior to using a car wash facilitycheck the suitability of it for yourvehicle.
Some car wash installations usewater at high pressure. This coulddamage certain parts of your vehicle.
Remove the aerial before using anautomatic car wash.
Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the freshair filter.
We recommend that you wash yourvehicle with a sponge and lukewarmwater containing a car shampoo.
Cleaning the headlamps
CAUTIONSDo not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solventsor chemical solvents to clean them.
Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.
Cleaning the rearwindow
CAUTION
Do not scrape the inside of the rearwindowor use abrasives or chemicalsolvents to clean it.
Use a clean, lint free cloth or a dampchamois leather to clean the inside of therear window.
Cleaning the chrome trim
CAUTION
Do not use abrasives or chemicalsolvents. Use soapy water.
Body paintwork preservation
CAUTIONSDo not polish your vehicle in strongsunshine.
Do not allow polish to touch plasticsurfaces. It could be difficult toremove.
Donot apply polish to thewindscreenor rear window. This could cause thewipers to become noisy and they
may not clear the window properly.
We recommend that you wax thepaintwork once or twice a year.
CLEANINGTHE INTERIOR
Seat belts
WARNINGSDo not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.
Do not allow moisture to penetratethe seat belt retractor mechanism.
Clean the seat belts with interior cleaneror water applied with a soft sponge. Letthe seat belts dry naturally, away fromartificial heat.
226
Vehicle care
Instrument cluster screens,LCD screens, radio screens
WARNING
Do not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents toclean them.
REPAIRINGMINORPAINTDAMAGE
CAUTION
Removeapparently harmless lookingsubstances from the paintworkimmediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree
resins, insect remains, tar spots, road saltand industrial fall out).
You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choiceof products is available from your FordDealer. Read and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.
227
Vehicle care
USINGBOOSTERCABLES
CAUTIONSConnect batterieswith only the samenominal voltage.
Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.
Do not disconnect the battery fromthe vehicle’s electrical system.
Toconnect thebooster cables
A
B
C D
E102925
Flat battery vehicleA
Booster battery vehicleB
Positive connection cableC
Negative connection cableD
1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.
2. Switch off the engine and anyelectrical equipment.
3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicleBwith the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).
4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicleB to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D). See Batteryconnection points (page 229).
CAUTIONSDonotconnect to thenegative(–) terminal of the flat battery.
Make sure that the cables are clearof any moving parts.
To start the engine
1. Run the engine of vehicle B atmoderately high speed.
2. Start the engine of vehicle A.3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of
three minutes before disconnectingthe cables.
CAUTION
Do not switch on the headlampswhen disconnecting the cables. Thepeak voltage could blow the bulbs.
Disconnect the cables in the reverseorder.
CHANGINGTHEVEHICLEBATTERY
CAUTION
For vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly
the same specification as the original.
228
Vehicle battery
Note:Where applicable, the audiosystemmust be reprogrammed with thekeycode.
The battery is located in the enginecompartment. SeeMaintenance (page209).
BATTERYCONNECTIONPOINTS
E114494
CAUTION
Donotconnect to thenegative(–) terminal of the flat battery.
229
Vehicle battery
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTIONSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make
the National Type Approval invalid.
If you change the diameter of thetyres from that fitted at the factory,the speedometer may not display
the correct speed. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to have the enginemanagement system reprogrammed.
A decal with tyre pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar.
Check and set the tyre pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive the vehicle and whenthe tyres are cold.
CHANGINGAROADWHEEL
Lockingwheel nuts
You can obtain a replacement lockingwheel nut key and replacement lockingwheel nuts from your dealer using thereference number certificate.
Vehicleswith a temporarysparewheel
WARNINGSDo not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
Drive the shortest possibledistances.
Do not fit more than one sparewheel on your vehicle at any onetime.
Do not use snowchains on this typeof wheel.
WARNINGSDo not drive through an automaticcar wash.
Do not carry out any tyre repairs ona temporary spare wheel.
CAUTION
The ground clearance of your vehiclewill be reduced. Take care whenparking next to a curb.
Note: Your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.
Vehicle jack
WARNINGSThe vehicle jack supplied with yourvehicle should only be used whenchanging a wheel in emergency
situations.
Before using the vehicle jack, checkthat it is not damaged or deformedand that the thread is lubricated and
free from foreign matter.
Never place anything between thejack and the ground, or the jack andthe vehicle.
Note: Vehicles with a tyre repair kit arenot equipped with a vehicle jack or awheel brace.
It is recommended to use a workshoptype hydraulic jack for changing betweensummer and winter tyres.
Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting platewith aminimumdiameter of 80millimetres(3.1 inches).
230
Wheels and tyres
Vehicleswithout tyre repair kit
A
B
C
E86843
JackA
Wheel braceB
Space for lockingwheel nut keyC
Your vehicle jack and wheel brace arelocated in the spare wheel well.
Jacking and lifting points
CAUTION
Use only the specified jacking points.If you use other positions, you maydamage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system orthe fuel lines.
E92658
A
B
Emergency use onlyA
MaintenanceB
231
Wheels and tyres
E93184
A
Indentations in the sills A show thelocation of the jacking points.
E92932
E93020
Vehicleswith side skirts
E95345
Assembling thewheel brace
Type one
WARNING
When returning the wheel braceextension to its original position, takecare not to get your fingers caught.
Note:Make sure that the wheel brace isfully extended.
E122546
Extend the wheel brace.
Type two
CAUTION
The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure
that the towing eye is fully tightened.
The screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.
232
Wheels and tyres
E122502
Insert the screw-in towing eye into thewheel brace.
Removing thewheel trim
Type one
Insert the flat end of the wheel bracebetween the rim and the trim and carefullyremove the trim.
Type two
E122314
2
1
1. Insert the wheel trim remover.
2. Remove the wheel trim.
Note:Make sure that you pull the wheeltrim remover at right angles to the trim.
Removing a roadwheel
WARNINGSPark your vehicle in such a positionthat neither the traffic nor you arehindered or endangered.
Set up a warning triangle.
Make sure that the vehicle is on firm,level ground with the wheelspointing straight ahead.
Switch off the ignition and apply theparking brake.
If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, select first or reversegear. If it has an automatic
transmission, select park.
Have the passengers leave thevehicle.
Secure the diagonally oppositewheel with an appropriate block orwheel chock.
Make sure that the arrows ondirectional tyres point in the directionof rotation when the vehicle is
moving forwards. If you have to fit a sparewheel with the arrows pointing in theopposite direction, have the tyre refittedin the correct direction by a properlytrained technician.
Do notwork underneath the vehiclewhen it is supported only by a jack.
Make sure that the jack is vertical tothe jacking point and the base is flaton the ground.
CAUTION
Donot lay alloywheels face downonthe ground, this will damage thepaint.
233
Wheels and tyres
Note: The spare wheel is located underthe floor cover in the luggagecompartment.
E71948
1. Install the locking wheel nut key.
2. Slacken the wheel nuts.
3. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre isclear of the ground.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and thewheel.
Installing a roadwheel
WARNINGSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make
the National Type Approval invalid. SeeTechnicalspecifications (page 240).
Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer
for more details regarding compatibility.
CAUTION
Do not install alloy wheels usingwheel nuts designed for use withsteel wheels.
Note: Thewheel nuts of alloywheels andspoked steel wheels can also be used forthe steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).
Note:Make sure the wheel and hubcontact surfaces are free from foreignmatter.
Note:Make sure that the cones on thewheel nuts are against the wheel.
1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. Install the locking wheel nut key.
1
2
3 4
5
E75442
4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove thejack.
6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown. See Technicalspecifications (page 240).
7. Install the hub cap or cover using theball of your hand.
234
Wheels and tyres
WARNING
Have the wheel nuts checked fortightness and the tyre pressurechecked as soon as possible.
TYREREPAIRKIT
Your vehicle may not have a spare tyre.In this case it will have an emergency tyrerepair kit that can be used to repair oneflat tyre.
The tyre repair kit is located in the sparewheel well.
General information
WARNINGSDepending on the type and extentof tyre damage, some tyres canonly be partially sealed or not sealed
at all. Loss of tyre pressure can affectvehicle handling, leading to loss of vehiclecontrol.
Do not use the tyre repair kit if thetyre has already been damaged asa result of being driven under
inflated.
Do not use the tyre repair kit on runflat tyres.
Do not try to seal damage otherthan that located within the visibletread of the tyre.
Do not try to seal damage to thetyre’s sidewall.
The tyre repair kit seals most tyrepunctures [with a diameter of up to sixmillimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarilyrestore mobility.
Observe the following rules when usingthe kit:
• Drivewith caution and avoidmaking sudden steering ordrivingmanoeuvres, especially ifthe vehicle is heavily loaded or you aretowing a trailer.
• The kit will provide you with anemergency temporary repair, enablingyou to continue your journey to thenext vehicle or tyre dealer, or to drivea maximum distance of200 kilometres (125 miles).
• Do not exceed amaximumspeedof 80 km/h (50mph).
• Keep the kit out of the reach ofchildren.
• Only use the kit when the ambienttemperature is between –30°C (-22°F)and +70°C (+158°F).
Using the tyre repair kit
WARNINGSCompressed air can act as anexplosive or propellant.
Never leave the tyre repair kitunattended while in use.
CAUTION
Do not keep the compressoroperating for more than 10 minutes.
Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for thevehicle with which it was supplied.
• Park your vehicle at the roadside sothat you do not obstruct the flow oftraffic and so that you are able to usethe kit without being in danger.
• Apply the parking brake, even if youhave parked on a level road, to makesure that the vehicle will not move.
• Do not attempt to remove foreignobjects like nails or screwspenetratingthe tyre.
235
Wheels and tyres
• Leave the engine running while the kitis in use, but not if the vehicle is in anenclosed or poorly ventilated area (forexample, inside a building). In thesecircumstances, switch thecompressor onwith the engine turnedoff.
• Replace the sealant bottle with a newone before the expiry date (see topof bottle) is reached.
• Inform all other users of the vehiclethat the tyre has been temporarilysealed with the tyre repair kit andmake them aware of the specialdriving conditions to be observed.
Inflating the tyre
WARNINGSCheck the sidewall of the tyre priorto inflation. If there are any cracks,bumps or similar damage, do not
attempt to inflate the tyre.
Do not stand directly beside the tyrewhile the compressor is pumping.
Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If anycracks, bumps or similar damageappear, turn off the compressor and
let the air out by means of the pressurerelief valveB. Do not continue drivingwiththis tyre.
The sealant contains natural rubberlatex. Avoid contact with skin andclothing. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty ofwater and contact your doctor.
If the tyre inflation pressure does notreach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within sevenminutes, the tyremay have suffered
excessive damage, making a temporaryrepair impossible. In this case, do notcontinue driving with this tyre.
CAUTION
Screwing the bottle onto the bottleholder will pierce the seal of thebottle. Do not unscrew the bottle
from the holder as the sealantwill escape.
E94973
BJ
I
FE
C
KA
G
H
D
Protective capA
Pressure relief valveB
HoseC
Orange capD
Bottle holderE
Pressure gaugeF
236
Wheels and tyres
Power plug with cableG
Compressor switchH
LabelI
Bottle lidJ
Sealant bottleK
1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit.
2. Peel off the label I showing themaximum permissible speed of80 km/h (50 mph) from the casingand attach it to the instrument panelin the driver’s field of view. Make surethe label does not obscure anythingimportant.
3. Take the hose C and the power plugwith cableG out of the kit.
4. Unscrew the orange cap D and thebottle lid J.
5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwiseinto the bottle holder E fully tight.
6. Remove the valve cap from thedamaged tyre.
7. Detach the protective capA from thehose C and screw the hose C firmlyonto the valve of the damaged tyre.
8. Make sure that the compressor switchH is in position 0.
9. Insert the power plugG into the cigarlighter socket or auxiliary powersocket. SeeCigarlighter (page 127).See Auxiliary power sockets(page 128).
10. Start the engine.
11. Move the compressor switch H toposition 1.
12. Inflate the tyre for no longer thanseven minutes to an inflationpressure ofminimum 1.8 bar (26 psi)and a maximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi).Move the compressor switch H toposition0 and check the current tyrepressure with pressure gauge F.
13. Remove the power plugG from thecigar lighter socket or auxiliary powersocket.
14. Quickly unscrew the hose C fromthe tyre valve and replace theprotective cap A. Fasten the valvecap again.
15. Leave the sealant bottle K in thebottle holder E.
16. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid andthe orange cap are stored safely, butstill easily accessible in the vehicle.The kit will be required again whenyou check the tyre pressure.
17. Immediately drive approximatelythree kilometres (two miles) so thatthe sealant can seal the damagedarea.
Note:When pumping in the sealantthrough the tyre valve, the pressure mayrise up to 6 bar (87 psi) but will drop againafter about 30 seconds.
WARNING
If you experience heavy vibrations,unsteady steering behaviour ornoises while driving, reduce your
speed and drive with caution to a placewhere it is safe for you to stop the vehicle.Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If thetyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi)or if there are any cracks, bumps or similardamage visible, do not continue drivingwith this tyre.
Checking the tyre pressure
1. Stop the vehicle after drivingapproximately three kilometres(two miles). Check, and wherenecessary, adjust the pressure of thedamaged tyre.
2. Attach the kit and read the tyrepressure from the pressure gauge F.
237
Wheels and tyres
3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyreis 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it tothe specified pressure. SeeTechnical specifications (page240).
4. Follow the inflation procedure onceagain to top up the tyre.
5. Check the tyre pressure again fromthe pressure gauge F. If the tyrepressure is too high, deflate the tyreto the specified pressure using thepressure relief valve B.
6. Once you have inflated the tyre to itscorrect tyre pressure, move thecompressor switch H to position 0,remove the power plugG from thesocket, unscrew the hose C, fastenthe valve cap and replace theprotective cap A.
7. Leave the sealant bottleK in the bottleholder E and store the kit away safelyin its original location.
8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist toget the damaged tyre replaced.Before the tyre is removed from therim, inform your tyre dealer that thetyre contains sealant. Renew the kitas soon as possible after it has beenused once.
Note: Remember that emergencyroadside tyre repair kits only providetemporary mobility. Regulationsconcerning tyre repair after usage of tyrerepair kit may differ from country tocountry. You should consult a tyrespecialist for advice.
WARNING
Before driving, make sure the tyreis adjusted to the recommendedinflation pressure. See Technical
specifications (page240). Monitor thetyre pressure until the sealed tyre isreplaced.
Empty sealant bottles can be disposedof togetherwith normal householdwaste.Return remains of sealant to your dealeror dispose of it in compliance with localwaste disposal regulations.
TYRECARE
E70415
To make sure the front and rear tyres ofyour vehicle wear evenly and last longer,we recommend that you swap the tyresfrom front to rear and vice versa at regularintervals of between 5 000 and 10 000km (3 000 and 6 000 miles).
CAUTION
Do not scrub the sidewalls of thetyres when you are parking.
If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowlyand approach it with the wheels atright-angles to the kerb.
Examine the tyres regularly for cuts,foreign objects and uneven wear of thetread. Uneven wear could mean that thewheel alignment is outside specification.
Check the tyre pressures (including thespare) when cold, every two weeks.
238
Wheels and tyres
USINGWINTER TYRES
CAUTION
Make sure that you use the correctwheel nuts for the type of wheel thewinter tyres are fitted to.
If winter tyres are used, make sure thatthe tyre pressures are correct. SeeTechnicalspecifications (page 240).
USINGSNOWCHAINS
WARNINGSDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).
Do not use snow chains onsnow-free roads.
Only fit snow chains to specifiedtyres. See Technicalspecifications (page 240).
CAUTION
If your vehicle is fitted with wheeltrims, remove them before fittingsnow chains.
Note: The ABS will continue to operatenormally.
Only use small link snow chains.
Only use snowchains on the frontwheels.
Vehicleswith stability control(ESP)
Vehicles with stability control (ESP) mayexhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics which can be avoided byswitching the system off. See Usingstability control (page 154).
TYREPRESSUREMONITORINGSYSTEM
WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to regularly checkthe tyre pressures.
The system will only provide a lowtyre pressure warning. It will notinflate the tyres.
The system may take longer todetect low pressure in the tyres ifyou have fitted snow chains.
Do not drive on significantlyunder-inflated tyres. Thismay causethe tyres to overheat and fail.
Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency,tyre tread life and may also affect yourability to drive the vehicle safely.
CAUTIONSDo not bend or damage the valveswhen you are inflating the tyres.
Have tyres installed by properlytrained technicians.
Note:After changing the tyres or sensorsthe system will take a few minutes toreset. During this period the system isoperational but a warning lamp mayappear.
The system monitors the pressure in thetyres using sensors located on thewheelsand a receiver located in your vehicle.When the system detects low pressurein the tyres, a warning message isdisplayed in the information display. SeeInformationmessages (page 97).
239
Wheels and tyres
If a low pressure warning message isdisplayed in the information display, checkthe tyre pressures as soon as possibleand inflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technicalspecifications (page 240). If thishappens frequently, have the causedetermined and rectified as soon aspossible.
Checking the tyre pressures
Note: If the tyre pressures are greaterthan or equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²), youwill see the + symbol below the pressurevalue. The system only measurespressure up to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²). The +symbol indicates that the tyre pressuresmay be higher.
Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Information.1. Press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. Highlight Information with the upand down buttons and press the rightarrow button.
3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with theup and down buttons and press theright arrow button.
4. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.
Setting the vehicle load
Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Setup.Correct tyre pressure settings depend onvehicle load. See Technicalspecifications (page240). The systemcan only detect low pressure if you haveentered the current vehicle load.
1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the mainmenu.
2. HighlightSetupwith the up anddownbuttons and press the right arrowbutton.
3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with theup and down buttons and press theright arrow button.
4. Highlight the desired setting and presstheOK button to confirm the setting.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS
Wheel nut torque
Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type
140 (103)All
240
Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressures (cold tyres)
Up to 80 km/h (50mph)
Full loadNormal load
Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)T125/90 R 16All
3 (44)3 (44)3 (44)3 (44)215/55 R 16Spare wheel whenit differs from theother fitted wheels
Up to 160 km/h (100mph)
Full loadNormal load
Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)205/55 R 16*1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)
2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)215/55 R 16*
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)
235/45 R18
2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/50 R 17
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)
241
Wheels and tyres
Full loadNormal load
Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)235/40 R 18
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)
3 (44)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)235/40 R 19
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)
2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)215/55 R 16*2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)
2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)
215/50 R 17,235/40 R 18,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R
19
2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)
*Only fit snow chains to specified tyres.
242
Wheels and tyres
Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100mph)
Full loadNormal load
Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
bar (lbf/in²)
2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)205/55 R 161.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)
3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)
215/55 R 16,235/40 R 18,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R
19
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4),2.3L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V
3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/50 R 17
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4),2.3L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V
3.2 (46)2.9 (42)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)
215/55 R 16,235/40 R 18,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R
19
2.0L EcoBoostSCTi (MI4)
3.2 (46)2.9 (42)2.4 (35)2.5 (36)215/50 R 172.0L EcoBoostSCTi (MI4)
3.1 (45)2.9 (42)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)
215/55 R 16,235/40 R 18,235/45 R 18and 235/40 R
19
2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)
3.1 (45)2.9 (42)2.4 (35)2.5 (36)215/50 R 17
2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)
243
Wheels and tyres
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE
Note: The vehicle identification platedesign may vary to that shown.
Note: The information shown on thevehicle identification plate is dependantupon market requirements.
E85610C
B
E D
A
Vehicle identification numberA
Gross vehicle weightB
Gross train weightC
Maximum front axle weightD
Maximum rear axle weightE
The vehicle identification number andmaximum weights are shown on a platelocated on the lock side of the right-handfront door aperture at the bottom.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)
E87496
The vehicle identification number isstamped into the floor panel on theright-hand side, beside the front seat. It isalso shown on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.
244
Vehicle identification
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle dimensions
DA
EB
C
E87089
4-door
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
4 850 (190.9)Maximum length - withoutbumper styling kit
A
4866 (191.6)Maximum length - withbumper styling kit
A
2 092 (82.4)Overall width includingexterior mirrors
B
245
Technical specifications
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
1 460 - 1 500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall height at EC kerbweight
C
2 850 (112.2)WheelbaseD
1 579 - 1 589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front trackE
1 595 - 1 605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear trackE
5-door
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
4 784 (188.3)Maximum length - withoutbumper styling kit
A
4800 (189)Maximum length - withbumper styling kit
A
2 092 (82.4)Overall width includingexterior mirrors
B
1 460 - 1 500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall height at EC kerbweight
C
2 850 (112.2)WheelbaseD
1 579 - 1 589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front trackE
1 595 - 1 605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear trackE
Estate
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
4 837 (190.4)Maximum length - withoutbumper styling kit
A
4858 (191.3)Maximum length - withbumper styling kit
A
2 092 (82.4)Overall width includingexterior mirrors
B
1 472 - 1 512 (58 - 59.5)Overall height at EC kerbweight without roof bars
C
246
Technical specifications
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
1 508 - 1 548 (59.4 - 61)Overall height at EC kerbweight including roof bars
C
2 850 (112.2)WheelbaseD
1 579 - 1 589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front trackE
1 595 - 1 605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear trackE
Towing equipment dimensions
C
A
FG
D
B
E
E87092
4-door
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
102 (4)Bumper – end of tow ballA
247
Technical specifications
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
1 (0.04)Attachment point – centreof tow ball
B
1 150 (45.3)Wheel centre – centre oftow ball
C
438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – sidemember
D
876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE
434 (17.1)Centre of tow ball – centre1. attachment point
F
707 (27.8)Centre of tow ball – centre2. attachment point
G
5-door
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
100 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ballA
98 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ball(with sport bumper)
A
1 (0.04)Attachment point – centreof tow ball
B
1 080 (42.5)Wheel centre – centre oftow ball
C
438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – sidemember
D
876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE
364 (14.3)Centre of tow ball – centre1. attachment point
F
637 (25.1)Centre of tow ball – centre2. attachment point
G
248
Technical specifications
Estate
Dimensioninmm(inches)Dimension descriptionItem
100 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ball(without bumper styling kit)
A
95 (3.7)Bumper – end of tow ball(with bumper styling kit)
A
113 (4.4)Bumper – end of tow ball(without bumper styling kit,with self levelling suspen-
sion)
A
108 (4.3)Bumper – end of tow ball(with bumper styling kit,with self levelling suspen-
sion)
A
1 (0.04)Attachment point – centreof tow ball
B
1 135 - 1 140 (44.7 - 44.9)Wheel centre – centre oftow ball
C
438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – sidemember
D
876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE
419 - 429 (16.5 - 16.9)Centre of tow ball – centre1. attachment point
F
692 - 702 (27.2 - 27.6)Centre of tow ball – centre2. attachment point
G
249
Technical specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION
Using the systemwith the engine offwill drain the battery.
This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth mobile phonehands free system.
The Bluetooth mobile phone part of thesystemprovides interactionwith the audioor navigation system and your mobilephone. It allows you to use the audio ornavigation system to make and receivecalls without having to hold your mobilephone.
Compatibility of phones
CAUTION
As no common agreement exists,mobile phonemanufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in
their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insomecasesmay significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.
Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for fulldetails.
TELEPHONESETUP
Phonebook
After start up access to the phonebooklist can be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.
Phonebook categories
Depending on your phonebook entry,different categories can be displayed inthe audio unit.
For example:
MobileM
OfficeO
HomeH
FaxF
Note: Entries may be displayed withouta category attachment.
The category can also be indicated as anicon:
E87990
Phone
E87991
Mobile
E87992
Home
E87993
Office
E87994
Fax
Making a phone an activephone
When using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.
Bluetooth phone
After bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.
250
Telephone
Select the phone from the active phonemenu.
Turning the ignition and radio or navigationunit back on again, the last active phoneis picked up by the system.
Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed onthe phone.
BondanotherBluetoothphone
Bond a new Bluetooth phone asdescribed in the requirements for aBluetooth connection.
Phones stored in the system areaccessible by using the phone list on theaudio unit.
Note: Amaximumof six devicesmay bebonded. If six Bluetooth devices havealready been bonded, one of these hasto be debonded in order to bond a newdevice.
BLUETOOTHSETUP
Before you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.
Handling of phones
Up to six Bluetooth devices can bebonded to the vehicle system.
Note: If there is an ongoing call when thephone in use is selected as the newactivephone, the call is transferred to the vehicleaudio system.
Note: Even if connected to the carsystem, your phone can still be used inthe usual way.
Requirements for Bluetoothconnection
The following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can bemade.
1. The Bluetooth feature must beactivated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set toON. For information on phonesettings, refer to your phone userguide.
2. In the Bluetoothmenu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.
3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phonekeypad. If no code number is shownon the display, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phonekeypad. Now enter the Bluetooth PINnumber shown on the vehicle display.
4. If your mobile phone asks you toauthorize the automatic connection,select YES.
Note: A phone call will be disconnectedif the audio unit is switched off. If theignition key is turned to the off positionthe phone call will remain in progress.
251
Telephone
TELEPHONECONTROLS
Remote control
Voice, accept and reject button
E876622
1
Voice button1
Accept and reject button2
The VOICE button is used to activate orswitch off the Voice control.
On vehicles with an accept and rejectbutton, phone calls can be accepted andrejected by pressing the appropriatebutton.
Note: Some audio units have the acceptand reject buttons on the front bezel.These operate in the same way.
USINGTHE TELEPHONE -VEHICLESWITHOUT:NAVIGATIONSYSTEM
This chapter describes the phonefunctions of the audio unit.
Note: Refer to your audio guide fordetails of the controls.
An active phone must be present.
Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.
Note: You can exit the phone menu bypressing any source buttonCD,AM/FMor AUX.
Making a call
Dialling a number using voicecontrol
Phonenumbers canbedialled using voicecontrol. See Telephone commands(page 267).
Diallinganumberusingtheaddressbook
You can access your phone addressbook via Bluetooth. The entrieswill appearin the unit display.
1. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton.
2. Press theMENU button.
3. Keep pressing theMENUbutton untilPHONEBOOK appears.
4. Press the seek buttons to select thedesired phone number.
Note: Press and hold the seek button toskip to the next letter in the alphabet.
5. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the selected phonenumber.
Diallinganumberusingtheaddressbook - Sony radio
You can access your phone addressbook via Bluetooth. The entrieswill appearin the unit display.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the seek button until the phonebook is shown.
3. Press the up/down arrow buttons toselect the desired phone number.
Note:Press and hold the up/downarrowbuttons to skip to the next letter in thealphabet.
4. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the selected phonenumber.
252
Telephone
Dialling a number using thetelephone keypad
If you have an audio unit with a telephonekeypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):
1. Press the call accept button. PressthePHONEbutton if you have a Sonyradio.
2. Dial the number using the telephonekeypad on the audio unit.
3. Press the call accept button.
Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press the seekleft button to erase the last digit. A longpress will erase the complete string ofdigits.
Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.
Ending a call
Calls can be ended by pressing the callreject button.
Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also end a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM orON/OFF, orby pressing theMODE button on theremote control
Redialling a number
1. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton.
2. Press theMENU button.
3. Select the CALLOUT list or theCALL IN list. On some audio units,select theMISSED, INCOMING orOUTGOING calls list.
Note: If the active phone does notprovide a call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.
4. Press the seek button on the audiounit.
5. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the desired phonenumber.
Redialling a number - Sony radio
1. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton.
2. Press the seek button until the desiredlist is displayed.
Note: If the active phone does notprovide a call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.
3. Press the up/down buttons to selectthe desired phone number.
4. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the phone number.
Redialling the last dialled number -Sony radio
1. Press the call accept button.
2. Press the call accept button a secondtime to dial the number.
Receiving an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be accepted bypressing either the call accept button, thePHONE button or theMODE button onthe remote control.
Rejecting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be rejected bypressing the call reject button.
Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also reject a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM orON/OFF.
Receiving a second incomingcall
Note: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.
If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.
253
Telephone
Accepting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,thePHONEbutton, or theMODEbuttonon the remote control.
Rejecting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be rejected bypressing the call reject button. Unitswithout a telephone keypad can alsoreject a second incoming call by pressingthe CD button, or the AM/FM button.
Muting themicrophone
During a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.
Audio unitswith green call acceptbutton
Press the call accept button. Press thebutton once again to turn this function off.
Audio unitswithout green callaccept button
Press the seek up or down button. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.
Changing the active phone
Note: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.
Using the station storage button
Note: This process is only for audio unitswithout a telephone keypad.
1. Press the PHONE button on theaudio unit.
2. Press the preset number required(using the station preset buttons 1 -6).
Using the audio unitmenu
Note: After bonding a phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.
1. Press the PHONE or call acceptbutton.
2. Press theMENU button on the audiounit.
3. Select the ACTIVEPHONE optionon the audio unit.
4. Scroll through the different storedphones by using the seek buttons todisplay the bonded phones.
5. Press theMENU button to select thephonewhich is to be the active phone.
Debonding a bonded phone
Abondedphone canbedeleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.
1. Press the PHONE or call acceptbutton.
2. Press theMENU button on the audiounit.
3. Select the DEBOND option on theaudio unit.
4. Scroll through the different phones byusing the seek buttons anddisplay thephone to be debonded.
5. Press theMENU button to select thephone which is to be debonded.
Debonding a bonded phone -Sony radio
Abondedphone canbedeleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/downarrowbuttons untilyou reach the DEBOND option.
254
Telephone
3. Scroll through the different phones byusing the seek buttons anddisplay thephone to be debonded.
4. Press the OK button to be debond.
USINGTHE TELEPHONE -VEHICLESWITH:NAVIGATIONSYSTEM
This chapter describes the phonefunctions of the Navigation System.
Note: Refer to your Navigation Systemguide for details of the controls.
An active phone must be present.
Even if connected to the NavigationSystem, your phone can still be used inthe usual way.
Making a call
Dialling a number
Phonenumbers canbedialled using voicecontrol. See Voice control (page 257).
Ending a call
Calls can be ended by pressing either theEND button, theMODE button on theremote switch or theON/OFF button onthe navigation system.
Redialling a number
1. Press thePHONE button on the unit.2. Select REDIAL.
Receiving an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be accepted bypressing either the call accept button, theMODEbutton on the remote control, thePHONE button on the unit or by usingthe ACCEPT option in the menu.
Rejecting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be rejected bypressing either the call reject button, theCD orAM/FM buttons on the unit, or byusing the REJECT option in the menu.
Receiving a second incomingcall
Note: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.
If there is an incoming call, whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.
Accepting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,theMODEbutton on the remote control,the PHONE button on the unit or byusing the ACCEPT option in the menu.
Note: This will cancel the ongoing call.
Rejecting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be rejected bypressing either the call reject button, orone of the following buttons on the unit:CD, AM/FM.
Muting themicrophone
During a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.
SDnavigation units
Press the mute button (symbol of amicrophone with a line through it). Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.
255
Telephone
CDnavigation units
Press themicrophonemutebutton. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.
Changing the active phone
Note: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.
Note: After bonding a phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.
1. Press thePHONE button on the unit.2. Using the BTSETTINGS option in
the menu, select the active phonefrom the list.
Debonding a bonded phone
Abondedphone canbedeleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.
1. Press thePHONE button on the unit.2. Select the BTSETTINGS option in
the menu.
3. Select the DEBOND option in themenu.
4. Select the phone from the list.
256
Telephone
PRINCIPLEOFOPERATION
CAUTION
Using the systemwith the engine offwill drain the battery.
Voice recognition enables operation ofthe systemwithout the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedbackfrom the system.
Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, thevoice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.
Please familiarise yourself with thefunctions of the systembefore using voicerecognition.
Supported commands
The voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:
• Bluetooth phone
• radio
• CD Player/CD Changer
• external device (USB)
• external device (iPod)
• automatic climate control
• navigation system - refer to separatenavigation handbook).
System response
As you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.
Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.
If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.
The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.
Voice commands
All voice commands should begivenusinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.
USINGVOICECONTROL
Systemoperation
The order and content of the voicecontrols are given in the following lists. Thetables show the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses foreach available function.
<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.
Short cuts
There are a number of voice commandshort cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:
• phone: "MOBILE NAME", "DIALNUMBER", "DIAL NAME", and"REDIAL"
• CD player/CD changer: "DISC" and"TRACK"
257
Voice control
• automatic climate control:"TEMPERATURE", "AUTO MODE","DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" and"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"
• radio: "TUNE NAME"
• external device (USB): "TRACK"
• external device (iPod): "TRACK"
• SD card: "TRACK".
Start communicatingwith thesystem
Before you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE orMODE button for each operation andwait until the systemanswerswith a beep.See (page 257).
Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.
Name tag
The name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORENAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavourite radio stations and personalphone contacts. See Audio unitcommands (page258). SeeTelephonecommands (page 267). SeeNavigation systemcommands(page 272).
• Store up to 20name tags per function.
• The average recording time for eachname tag is approximately 2-3seconds.
AUDIOUNITCOMMANDS
CDPlayer
You can control playback directly by voicecontrol.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"CDPLAYER"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"*
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT FOLDER"**
258
Voice control
"CDPLAYER"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.
Track
You can choose a track on your CDdirectly.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2
"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)
Shuffle all
To set random playback.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1
"SHUFFLE ALL"2
CDChanger
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
259
Voice control
"CDCHANGER"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"DISC"*
"TRACK"*
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE CD"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT CD"
"REPEAT FOLDER"**
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.
Disc
If you have aCDchanger you can choosethe disc number.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1
"DISC NUMBER PLEASE""DISC"*2
"DISC <number>""<a number between 1 and 6>"3
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Track
You can choose a track on your CDdirectly.
260
Voice control
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2
"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)
Shuffle CD
To set random playback within the CDcontents.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1
"SHUFFLE CD"2
Radio
The radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.
"RADIO"
"HELP"
"AM"
"FM"
"TUNE NAME"*
"DELETE NAME"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"STORE NAME"
261
Voice control
"RADIO"
"PLAY"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Tune frequency
This function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2
"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"
"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3
* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.
FMband: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1
• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)
• "Ninety" (90.0)
• "One hundred point five" (100.5)
• "One zero one point one" (101.1)
• "One zero eight" (108.0)
AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in incrementsof 9
AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of1
• "Five thirty one" (531)
• "Nine hundred" (900)
• "Fourteen forty" (1440)
• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)
• "Ten eighty" (1080)
Store name
If you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"
"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3
"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"
262
Voice control
Tune name This function allows you to call up a storedradio station.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2
"TUNE <name>""<name>"3
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Delete name
This function allows you to delete a storedradio station.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2
"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DELETED""YES"4
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Play directory
This function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2
Delete directory
This function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.
263
Voice control
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Play
This function switches the audio sourceto the radio mode.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"PLAY"2
Auxiliary input
This function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliaryinput device.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"LINE IN""LINE IN"2
External devices - USB
These voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB devicewhich may be connected to the audiounit.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"EXTERNALDEVICE", "USB"
"HELP"
264
Voice control
"EXTERNALDEVICE", "USB"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"*
"PLAYLIST"**
"FOLDER"**
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"
"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT FOLDER"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.SeeGeneral information (page 275).
USBplay
This function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attachedUSBdevice.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"USB""USB"2
"PLAY"3
USBTrack
You can choose a track on your USBdevice directly.
265
Voice control
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"USB""USB"2
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3
"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4
* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)
External devices - iPod
These voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"EXTERNALDEVICE", "IPOD"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"*
"PLAYLIST"**
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists activated by voice controlmust be assigned special filenames. SeeGeneralinformation (page 275).
266
Voice control
iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"IPOD""IPOD"2
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*3
"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**4
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.
iPod playlist
You can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"IPOD""IPOD"2
"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE""PLAYLIST"*3
"PLAYLIST <number>""<a number between 1 and 10>"4
* Playlists activated by voice controlmust be assigned special filenames. SeeGeneralinformation (page 275).
TELEPHONECOMMANDS
Phone
Your phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialled by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
267
Voice control
"PHONE"
"HELP"
"MOBILE NAME"*
"DIAL NUMBER"*
"DIAL NAME"*
"DELETE NAME"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"STORE NAME"
"REDIAL"*
"ACCEPT CALLS"
"REJECT CALLS"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Phone functions
Dial number
Phone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2
"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"
"DIALLING""DIAL"4
"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"CONTINUE?"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
268
Voice control
Dial name Phone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"*2
"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DIALLING""YES"4
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Redial
This function allows you to redial the lastdialled phone number.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DIALLING""YES"3
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Mobile name
This function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"MOBILE NAME" "<phonedependent dialogue>"
"MOBILE NAME"*2
* Can be used as a shortcut.
269
Voice control
DTMF (Tone dialling)
This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to makea remote enquiry to your homeansweringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.
Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Press the VOICE button andwait for the system prompt.
Can only be used with vehicles installedwith a dedicated VOICE button.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"NUMBER PLEASE"1
"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2
Create a phonebook
Store name
New entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by callingup the name instead of the full phonenumber.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"
"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3
"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED""NUMBER PLEASE"
"<phone number>""<phone number>"5
"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"
Delete name
Stored names can also be deleted fromthe directory.
270
Voice control
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2
"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"<name> DELETED""YES"4
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Play directory
Use this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2
Delete directory
This function allows you to delete allentries in one go.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Main settings
Reject calls
Calls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.
271
Voice control
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2
"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*
* use this command to turn the reject mode off
NAVIGATIONSYSTEMCOMMANDS
Please refer to your separate Navigationhandbook for details of the commandmenus.
CLIMATECONTROLCOMMANDS
Climate
The climate voice commands supportsthe functionality of the fan speed,temperature and mode settings. Not allfunctions are available on all vehicles.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"CLIMATE"
"HELP"
"FAN"*
"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*
"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*
"TEMPERATURE"*
"AUTO MODE"*
* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the"FAN" shortcut is not available.
272
Voice control
Fan This function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2
"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"
3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"
"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"
* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the"FAN" shortcut is not available.
Defrosting/Demisting
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"DEFROSTINGON/DEMISTINGON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING
ON"*2
"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTINGOFF"
"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING
OFF"*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Temperature
This function allows you to adjust thetemperature.
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2
"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"
3"TEMPERATURE <number>"
"<a number between 15 and 29 °Cwith 0.5 increments>" or "<a
number between 59 and 84 °F>"
273
Voice control
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Automode
SystemanswerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2
* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperatureor fan speed.
274
Voice control
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTIONSTake care when handling externaldevices with exposed electricalconnectors (such as the USB plug).
Always replace the protective cap/shieldwhen possible. There may be a risk ofelectrostatic discharge causing damageto the device.
Do not touch or handle the USBsocket in the vehicle. Cover thesocket when not in use.
Only use USB Mass-Storage devicecompliant devices.
Always switch your audio unit to adifferent source (for example theradio) before unplugging the USB
device.
Do not install or connect USB hubsor splitters.
Note: The system is only designed torecognize and read suitable audio filesfrom a USB device that conforms to theUSB Mass-Storage device class or aniPod. Not all available USBdevices can beguaranteed to function with the system.
Note: It is possible to connect compatibledevices with a trailing USB lead as well asthose that plug into the vehicle USBsocket directly (for exampleUSBmemorysticks and pen drives).
Note: Some USB devices with a higherpower consumption may not becompatible (for example some larger harddrives).
Note: Access time to read the files onthe external device will vary dependingupon factors such as the file structure,size and device content.
The system supports a range of externaldevices, to fully integrate with your audiounit via the USB and auxiliary inputsockets. Once connected, control of theexternal device is possible via the audiounit.
A list of typical compatible devices areshown below:• USB memory sticks
• USB portable hard drives
• Some MP3 players with USBconnection
• iPod media players (refer towww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for latestcompatibility list).
The system is USB 2.0 full speedcompatible, USB 1.1 host compliant andsupports FAT 16/32 file systems.
Information on audio filestructuresforexternaldevices
USB
Create only a single partition on the USBdevice.
If playlists are created, they must containcorrect file paths referenced to the USBdevice. It is recommended to create theplaylist after the audio files have beentransferred to the USB device.
Playlists must be created in .m3u format.
Audio files must be in .mp3 format.
Do not exceed the following limits:• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and
playlists)• 5000 folders per USB device
(including playlists)• 8 subfolder levels.
275
Connectivity
To enable voice control for customplaylists and folders, follow the procedurebelow:• Create folders named with the
structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford3"without an extension.
• Create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>.m3u"where <*>is a number 1-10. For example"Ford5.m3u" without any spacebetween "Ford" and the number.
Thereafter, custom folders and playlistswill be selectable with voice control. SeeAudio unit commands (page 258).
iPod
To enable voice control for customplaylists, create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>"where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford7"without any space between "Ford" andthe number.
Thereafter, playlists will be selectable withvoice control. See Audio unitcommands (page 258).
CONNECTINGANEXTERNALDEVICE
WARNING
Make sure the external device issecurelymountedwithin the vehicle,and that trailing connections do not
obstruct any of the driving controls.
External devicesmaybe connected usingthe auxiliary input socket and the USBport. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket (page 132). SeeUSBport (page132).
Connection
Plug in the device, and if necessarysecure it to preventmovement within thevehicle.
Connecting an iPod
For optimum convenience and audioquality,we recommend that youpurchasea dedicated single connection leadavailable from your dealer.
Alternatively, it is possible to connect youriPod using the standard iPod USB cableand a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. Ifusing thismethod preset the iPod volumeto maximum and turn off any equalizersettings before making the connections:
• Connect the headphoneoutput of theiPod to the AUX IN socket.
• Connect the USB cable from the iPodto the vehicle USB socket.
CONNECTINGANEXTERNALDEVICE - VEHICLESWITH:BLUETOOTH
Connecting aBluetooth audiodevice
CAUTION
As various standards exist,manufacturers are able to implementa variety of profiles in their Bluetooth
devices. Because of this, anincompatibility can occur between theBluetooth device and the system, whichin some cases may limit systemfunctionality. To avoid this situation, onlyrecommended devices should be used.
Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.comfor full details.
276
Connectivity
Bonding the device
Note: Some audio and navigation unitshave a separate Bluetooth audio menu.Use this to access setup and control.
To connect the device to the systemfollow the same procedure as forBluetooth hands free phones. SeeBluetooth setup (page 251).
Operating the device
Select Bluetooth audio as the activesource.
Tracks can be accessed by skippingforwards and backwards using thesteering wheel controls, or directly fromthe audio unit controls.
USINGAUSBDEVICE
Various icons are used to identify typesof audio file, folders etc.
E100029
USB device is the active source
E100022
Folder
E100023
Playlist
E100024
Album
E100025
Artist
E100026
Filename
E100027
Track title
E100028
Information not available
Sony radio
Operation
Select the USB device as the audiosource by repeatedly pressing theCD/AUX button until USB appears in thedisplay. After first connecting the USBdevice, the first track within the first folderwill start to play automatically.Subsequently, following audio sourceswitching, the position of playback on theUSB device is remembered.
To browse the device contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK buttononce.
The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current positionof the folder view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).
• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.
• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.
To navigate theUSBdevice contents, usethe up/down arrow keys to scroll throughlists, and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the folder hierarchy. Onceyour desired track, playlist or folder ishighlighted, press theOKbutton to selectplayback.
277
Connectivity
Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the USB device contents, press andhold the left arrow key.
Audio control
Press the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.
Press and hold the left/right arrow keysto enable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.
Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the device contents.
Press the MENU key to enter the USBmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here with respect tofolders and playlists.
Press the SCANbutton to scan thewholedevice, current folder or a playlist if it is inoperation.
Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename
• title
• artist
• album
• track number and playing time.
Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.
CDNavigation units
Operation
Select the USB device as the audiosource by pressing the CD/AUX buttonuntil DEVICES appears in the display.Select DEVICESand then select USB fromthe available device list. After firstconnecting theUSBdevice, the first trackwithin the first folder will start to playautomatically. Subsequently, followingaudio source switching, the position ofplayback on the USB device isremembered.
To browse the device contents, press theSELECT button once.
The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current positionof the folder view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).
• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.
• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.
To navigate theUSBdevice contents, usethe rotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contentswithin the highlighted playlistor folder, or to commence playback of aparticular track. Press ESC to go up onelevel.
Audio control
Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.
Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.
Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the device contents.
Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists. Differentoptions may appear depending uponwhether or not a playlist is in operation.
278
Connectivity
Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrent playlist if it is in operation, or thecomplete USB device or folder.
Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename
• title
• artist
• album
• track number and playing time.
SDNavigation units
Operation
Select the USB device as the audiosource by pressing the CD/AUX buttonuntil the USB button appears to the left ofthe display. Select USB from the availabledevice list.
Note: Some devices may be shown butnot selectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.
After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will start toplay automatically. Subsequently, followingaudio source switching, the position ofplayback on the USB device isremembered.
To browse the device contents, press thescroll up or down arrow button.
The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current positionof the folder view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).
• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.
• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.
To navigate theUSBdevice contents, usethe scroll buttons to browse through lists.Push the button to expand the contentswithin the highlighted playlist or folder, orto commence playback of a particulartrack. Press the left arrow key to go upone level.
Audio control
Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.
Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.
Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe device contents.
Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists.
Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrent playlist if it is in operation, or thecomplete USB device or folder.
Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename
• title
• artist
• album
• track number and playing time.
USINGAN IPOD
Various icons are used to identify typesof audio file, folders etc.
279
Connectivity
E100030
iPod is the active source
E100031
iPod playlist
E100032
iPod artist
E100033
iPod album
E100034
iPod genre
E100035
iPod song
E100036
iPod generic category
E100037
iPod generic media file
Sony radio
Operation
Connect the iPod. SeeConnectinganexternal device (page 276).
Select the iPod as the audio source byrepeatedly pressing theCD/AUX buttonuntil iPod appears in the display.
The iPodmenu list for browsing contentswill be available through the radio display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standaloneuse (for example search by artist, title,etc.). To browse the iPod contents, pressthe up/down arrow key or the OK buttononce.
The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current positionof the list view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.
To navigate the iPod contents, use theup/downarrowkeys to scroll through lists,and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the hierarchy. Once yourdesired track, playlist, album, artist orgenre is highlighted, press the OK buttonto select playback.
Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the iPod contents, press and hold theleft arrow key.
Audio control
Press the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.
Press and hold the left/right arrow keysto enable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.
Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the iPod contents.
Press theMENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possibleto enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.
Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.
280
Connectivity
Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title
• artist
• track number and playing time.
Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.
CDNavigation units
Operation
Connect the iPod. SeeConnectinganexternal device (page 276).
Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button untilDEVICES appears in the display. SelectDEVICES and then select iPod from theavailable device list.
The iPodmenu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standaloneuse (for example search by artist, title,etc.). To browse the iPod contents, pressthe SELECT button once.
The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current positionof the list view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.
To navigate the iPod contents, use therotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contentswithin the highlighted playlist,album, artist, genre or to commenceplayback of a particular track. PressESCto go up one level.
Audio control
Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.
Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.
Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the iPod contents.
Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possibleto enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.
Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.
Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title
• artist
• track number and playing time.
SDNavigation units
Operation
Connect the iPod. SeeConnectinganexternal device (page 276).
Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button until theiPod button appears to the left of thedisplay. Select iPod from the availabledevice list.
Note: Some devices may be shown butnot selectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.
281
Connectivity
The iPodmenu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standaloneuse (for example search by artist, title,etc.). To browse the iPod contents, pressthe scroll up or down arrow button.
The display will show the trackinformation, togetherwith other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of
the display shows the current positionof the list view.
• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.
To navigate the iPod contents, use thescroll buttons to browse through lists.Push the button to expand the contentswithin the highlighted playlist, album, artist,genre or to commence playback of aparticular track. Press the left arrow keyto go up one level.
Audio control
Press the SEEK up and down keys toskip backwards and forwards throughtracks.
Press and hold theSEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.
Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe iPod contents.
Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possibleto enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.
Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.
Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title
• artist
• track number and playing time.
282
Connectivity
ROADSAFETY
WARNINGSThe system provides you withinformation designed to help youreach your destination quickly and
safely.
For reasons of safety, the drivershould only program the systemwhen the vehicle is stationary.
The system provides no assistancewith respect to stop signs, trafficlights, areas under construction or
other important safety information.
Do not use the system until youhave familiarised yourself with itsoperation.
Only view the system display whendriving conditions permit.
Safety information
Read and follow all stated safetyprecautions. Failure to do somay increaseyour risk of collision and personal injury.Ford Motor Company shall not be liablefor any damages of any type arising fromfailure to follow these guidelines.
If detailed viewing of route instructions isnecessary, pull off the roadwhen it is safeto do so and park your vehicle.
Do not use the navigation system tolocate emergency services.
To use the system as effectively andsafely as possible, always use the latestnavigation information. Your dealer will beable to assist with this.
283
Navigation introduction
GETTINGSTARTED
CAUTION
Using the systemwith the engine offwill drain the battery.
Note: Youwill be chargedwhen sendingand receiving text messages.
Note:Refer to your phone handbook forall phone functions and operation.
Note: Keep the activation code (printedon the installation guide) in a safe place.
Note:Retain the activation textmessagein your mobile phone inbox.
Compatibility of phones
CAUTION
As no common agreement exists,mobile phonemanufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in
their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insomecasesmay significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.
Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com forfull details.
Installing themicro SDcard
1
2
E114212
1. Remove the micro SD card from theadaptor.
2. Insert the micro SD card into themobile phone.
Activating themobile phonenavigation system
Note: The radio must be switched onbefore connecting the mobile phone tothe in-car GPS receiver.
Note: The Ford Mobile Navigation mustbe installed and activated on your mobilephone.
Note: It is possible to activate up to amaximum of three phones.
Note: Detailed instructions are availableon the micro SD card and atwww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com.
To connect the device to the systemfollow the same procedure as forBluetooth hands free phones. SeeBluetooth setup (page 251).
1. Switch the radio on.
284
Navigation system
E114213
2. Switch yourmobile phoneon and startthe "Ford Mobile Navigation".
3. Choose "Select Destination".
4. Choose "Enter Address".
5. Change route options if necessaryand start the route guidance.
6. The vehicle display will show the turninformation. Voice instructions areheard via the vehicle speakers.
Note:Yourmobile phonewill display yourcurrent position.
7. You are able to exit the application andcontinue your route guidance afterrestarting the application.
285
Navigation system
TYPEAPPROVALS
FCC/INDUSTRYCANADANOTICE
This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
FCC ID: WJLRX-42
IC: 7847A-RX42
Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.
RX-42 - declaration ofconformity
We, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of thefollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of theDeclaration of Conformity canbe found at:
www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity
The Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford MotorCompany is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names are thoseof their respective owners.
TYPEAPPROVALS
E114214
© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.
286
Appendices
E114220
ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY
WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility
(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.
WARNINGS
Radio frequency (RF) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.)may
only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.
Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or anyother item in the deployment path
of the airbag system.
Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.
287
Appendices
WARNINGSKeep antenna and power cables atleast 100mm from any electronic
WARNINGSmodules and airbags.
E85998
1 2 3 4
AntennaPositionsMaximumoutput powerWatt(PeakRMS)
FrequencyBandMHz
3, 450 W1 – 30
1, 2, 350 W30 – 54
1, 2, 350 W68 – 87.5
1, 2, 350 W142 – 176
1, 2, 350 W380 – 512
1, 2, 310 W806 – 940
1, 2, 310 W1200 – 1400
1, 2, 310 W1710 – 1885
1, 2, 310 W1885 – 2025
Note: After the installation of RFtransmitters, check for disturbances fromand to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmitmodes.
Check all electrical equipment:• with the ignitionON• with the engine running
• during a road test at various speeds.
288
Appendices
Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable humanexposure requirements.
289
Appendices
290
AA/CSee: Climate control...................................107
About this handbook................................7ABSSee: Brakes.................................................153
ABS driving hintsSee: Hints on driving with ABS.................153
ACCSee: Adaptive cruise control (ACC).........167
AccessoriesSee: Parts and accessories..........................7See: Using ACC..........................................168
Active suspension.................................159Principle of operation.................................159
Active suspensionSee: Using active suspension...................159
Adaptive cruise control (ACC).............167Principle of operation.................................167
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)See: Using ACC..........................................168
Adaptive front lighting system(AFS).......................................................58Cornering lamps...........................................59
Adjusting the headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps............................................57
Adjusting the steering wheel.................48AFSSee: Adaptive front lighting system(AFS)...........................................................58
Air conditioningSee: Climate control...................................107
Air vents...................................................107Front air vents..............................................107Rear air vents...............................................107
Alarm.........................................................45Principle of operation...................................45
Appendices...........................................286Arming the alarm.....................................47Arming the engine immobiliser.............44Ashtray....................................................128Front ashtray...............................................128Rear ashtray................................................128
Audible warnings and indicators..........82Switching the chimes on and off...............82
Audio control...........................................48Mode..............................................................48Seek...............................................................49
Audio unit commands.........................258Auxiliary input..............................................264CD Changer................................................259CD Player....................................................258External devices - iPod.............................266External devices - USB.............................264Radio.............................................................261
Auto-dimming mirror..............................75Autolamps................................................55Automatic climate control.....................110Air distribution...............................................112Blower............................................................111Mono mode..................................................111Recirculated air............................................112Setting the temperature.............................111Switching off the automatic climatecontrol.......................................................112
Switching the air conditioning on andoff...............................................................112
To switch mono mode back on.................111To switch mono mode off...........................111Windscreen defrosting anddemisting..................................................112
Automatic main beam control..............55Activating the system..................................56Manually overriding the system.................56Setting the system sensitivity.....................56
Automatic transmission........................150Drive modes.................................................151Emergency park position releaselever...........................................................151
Hints on driving with an automatictransmission.............................................151
Selector lever positions.............................150Autowipers...............................................50
291
Index
Auxiliary heater.......................................113Changing the remote controlbattery.......................................................116
Diesel auxiliary heater (depending oncountry).....................................................117
Feedback during starting and switchingoff...............................................................116
Fuel operated heater (depending oncountry).....................................................117
Parking heater..............................................113Programming the transmitter....................116Remote start in combination with directstart or timer.............................................116
Remote starting...........................................115Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket............132Auxiliary power sockets.......................128
BBattery connection points...................229Blind spot monitor...................................75Blind spot information system (BLIS)........75Detection errors............................................77System detection and alerts......................76Turning the system on and off...................76Using the system..........................................75
Bluetooth setup.....................................251Handling of phones....................................251Requirements for Bluetoothconnection..............................................251
Bonnet lockSee: Opening and closing the bonnet.....210
Booster cablesSee: Using booster cables.......................228
Booster cushions....................................23Booster cushion (Group 3).........................24Booster seat (Group 2)...............................23
Brake and clutch fluid check..............222Brakes.....................................................153Principle of operation.................................153
Bulb changingSee: Changing a bulb..................................63
Bulb specification chart..........................69
CCargo nets..............................................183Luggage retention net...............................183
Car washSee: Cleaning the exterior........................226
Catalytic converter................................144Driving with a catalytic converter.............144
CD changer.............................................131Changing a bulb......................................63Approach lamp.............................................65Central high mounted brake lamp............66Daytime running lamps...............................64Front fog lamps............................................65Headlamp......................................................63Interior lamps.................................................67Luggage compartment lamp.....................69Number plate lamp......................................67Reading lamps..............................................68Rear lamps....................................................66Side repeater................................................64Vanity mirror lamp........................................68
Changing a fuse....................................195Changing a road wheel.......................230Assembling the wheel brace...................232Installing a road wheel...............................234Jacking and lifting points...........................231Locking wheel nuts...................................230Removing a road wheel............................233Removing the wheel trim.........................233Vehicle jack.................................................230Vehicles with a temporary sparewheel.......................................................230
Changing the remote controlbattery....................................................34Remote control with a folding keyblade..........................................................35
Remote control without a folding keyblade..........................................................35
Changing the vehicle battery.............228Changing the wiper blades...................52Rear window wiper blades.........................53Windscreen wiper blades...........................52
Checking the wiper blades...................52Child safety..............................................22Child safety locks....................................27Electric child safety locks............................28Manual child safety locks............................27
Child seat positioning.............................24Child seats................................................22Child restraints for different massgroups........................................................22
292
Index
Cigar lighter.............................................127Cleaning the exterior............................226Body paintwork preservation..................226Cleaning the chrome trim.........................226Cleaning the headlamps...........................226Cleaning the rear window........................226
Cleaning the interior.............................226Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens,radio screens..........................................227
Seat belts....................................................226Climate control.......................................107Principle of operation.................................107
Climate control commands................272Climate.........................................................272
Clock........................................................127Coded keys.............................................44Cold weather precautions...................192Connecting an external device..........276Connection.................................................276
Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth...................276Connecting a Bluetooth audiodevice......................................................276
Connectivity...........................................275General information...................................275
Convenience features..........................127Coolant checkSee: Engine coolant check.......................221
Cruise control.........................................165Principle of operation.................................165
Cruise controlSee: Using cruise control..........................165
Cup holders............................................129
DDaytime running lamps (DRL)...............55Detachable tow ball..............................188Driving with a trailer....................................190Driving without a trailer...............................191Inserting the tow ball arm..........................189Maintenance................................................191Removing the tow ball arm.......................190Unlocking the tow ball armmechanism..............................................189
Diesel particulate filter (DPF)................138Regeneration...............................................138
Direction indicators.................................60
Disabling the passenger airbag............32Disabling the passenger airbag.................33Enabling the passenger airbag..................33Fitting the passenger airbag deactivationswitch.........................................................32
Disarming the alarm................................47Vehicles with keyless entry.........................47Vehicles without keyless entry...................47
Disarming the engine immobiliser........44Dog guard...............................................184Installing behind the front seats...............185Installing behind the rear seats.................185
DPFSee: Diesel particulate filter (DPF)............138
Driver alert...............................................175Principle of operation.................................175
Driving hints............................................192Driving through water...........................192Driving through water ...............................192
EEco mode...............................................142Principle of operation.................................142
Electric exterior mirrors..........................73Electric folding mirrors.................................74Mirror tilting positions...................................73Reverse mirror dipping................................74
Electric seats..........................................1222-way electric seat.....................................1228-way electric seat.....................................123
Electric sunroof.......................................118Opening and closing the sunroof.............118Opening and closing the sunroofautomatically............................................119
Sunroof anti-trap protection......................119Sunroof relearning......................................120Sunroof safety mode.................................120Tilting the sunroof........................................119
293
Index
Electric windows......................................71Anti-trap function..........................................72Driver’s door switches..................................71Front and rear passengers’ doorswitches.....................................................71
Global opening and global closing.............71Opening and closing the windowsautomatically..............................................71
Resetting the memory of the electricwindows....................................................72
Safety mode..................................................73Safety switch for rear windows..................72
Electromagnetic compatibility............287Emergency equipment........................193Engine compartment overview - 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)..............211
Engine compartment overview - 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel................216
Engine compartment overview - 1.6LEcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)......................212
Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4)................................213
Engine compartment overview - 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel...............217
Engine compartment overview - 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4)..........................214
Engine compartment overview - 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel...............219
Engine compartment overview - 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)................................215
Engine coolant check...........................221Checking the coolant level........................221Topping up..................................................222
Engine heater.........................................138Engine immobiliser..................................44Principle of operation...................................44
Engine oil check.....................................221Checking the oil level.................................221Topping up...................................................221
Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)....................................220
Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel....................................................221
Engine oil dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma).................................................220
Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)...........220
Engine oil dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4).....................................................220
Exterior mirrors........................................73Manual folding mirrors.................................73
FFastening the seat belts.........................31First aid kit...............................................193Floor mats...............................................132Fog lampSee: Front fog lamps....................................57
Forward alert function...........................172Adjusting the warning sensitivity..............172Switching the system on and off..............172
Front fog lamps.......................................57Fuel and refuelling.................................143Technical specifications.............................145
Fuel burning heaterSee: Auxiliary heater....................................113
Fuel consumption..................................145Fuel consumptionSee: Technical specifications....................145
Fuel filler flap...........................................144Fuel quality - Diesel...............................143Long-term storage.....................................144
Fuel quality - E85...................................143Long-term storage.....................................143
Fuel quality - Petrol................................143Fuse box locations................................194Central fuse box.........................................194Engine compartment fuse box................194Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door........194Rear fuse box - Estate...............................195
Fuses.......................................................194Fuse specification chart.......................196Central fuse box.........................................201Engine compartment fuse box................196Rear fuse box.............................................203
GGauges.....................................................78Engine coolant temperature gauge..........79Fuel gauge.....................................................80
294
Index
GearboxSee: Transmission.......................................150
General driving points - Vehicles With:Sports Suspension.............................192
General information on radiofrequencies............................................34
Getting started......................................284Activating the mobile phone navigationsystem.....................................................284
Compatibility of phones............................284Installing the micro SD card......................284
Glasses holder........................................131Global opening and closing...................39Global closing................................................40Global opening.............................................40
Glove box...............................................129Cooled glove box.......................................129
HHandbrakeSee: Parking brake.....................................153
Hazard warning flashers........................60Headlamp adjustmentSee: Adjusting the headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps................................................57
Headlamp levelling..................................57Recommended headlamp levelling switchpositions....................................................58
Headlamp washers................................52Head restraints......................................124Adjusting the head restraint......................124Removing the head restraint....................124
Heated seats..........................................125Raising and lowering the temperatureautomatically...........................................125
Raising and lowering the temperaturemanually...................................................126
Heated windows and mirrors...............113Heated exterior mirrors..............................113Heated windows.........................................113
HeatingSee: Climate control...................................107
Hill launch assist (HLA)See: Using hill start assist..........................156
Hill start assist.........................................156Principle of operation.................................156
Hints on driving with ABS.....................153HLASee: Hill start assist.....................................156See: Using hill start assist..........................156
IIgnition switch........................................133ImmobiliserSee: Engine immobiliser..............................44
Information displays................................84General information.....................................84
Information messages...........................97Active suspension........................................98Airbag.............................................................98Alarm..............................................................98Automatic main beam control, Lanedeparture warning and Driver alert.......98
Battery and charging system.....................99Blind spot monitor........................................99Child power lock.........................................100Climate control............................................100Cruise control andAdaptive cruise control(ACC)........................................................100
Doors open..................................................100Engine immobiliser......................................101Hill start assist...............................................101Keyless system............................................101Lighting.........................................................102Maintenance...............................................102Message indicator........................................97Message symbols........................................97Occupant protection..................................103Parking brake..............................................103Power steering............................................103Stability control (ESP).................................104Start-stop.....................................................104Transmission................................................104Tyre pressure monitoring system............105Viewing current messages.........................97Voice control................................................106
Instrument lighting dimmer..................127Instruments..............................................78Interior lamps...........................................60Courtesy lamp..............................................60LED interior lighting.......................................61Reading lamps...............................................61Vanity mirror lamps.......................................61
295
Index
Introduction................................................7iPod connectionSee: Connecting an external device.......276See: Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth.......................276
iPodSee: Using an iPod.....................................279
ISOFIX anchor points..............................26Attaching a child seat with toptethers........................................................26
Top tether anchor points............................26
JJump startingSee: Using booster cables.......................228
KKeyless entry............................................41Disabled keys................................................43General information......................................41Locking and unlocking the doors with thekey blade...................................................43
Locking the vehicle.......................................41Passive key....................................................41Unlocking the vehicle...................................42
Keyless starting.....................................133Failure to start..............................................134Ignition on.....................................................133Starting a diesel engine.............................134Starting with automatic transmission......134Starting with manual transmission...........134Stopping the engine when the vehicle ismoving.....................................................135
Stopping the engine with the vehiclestationary.................................................135
Keys and remote controls.....................34
LLane departure warning.......................177Principle of operation..................................177
Lighting control........................................54Headlamp flasher.........................................54Home safe lighting.......................................55Lighting control positions............................54Main and dipped beam...............................54Parking lamps...............................................54
Lighting.....................................................54Load carriersSee: Roof racks and load carriers............184
Load carrying.........................................179General information....................................179
Load retaining fixtures..........................186Installing the load bracket..........................187Installing the load retaining fixtures..........186
Locking and unlocking...........................37Automatic relocking.....................................39Central locking..............................................37Double locking..............................................37Double locking the doors with thekey..............................................................37
Locking and unlocking confirmation.........37Locking and unlocking the doors and theluggage compartment lid with theremote control..........................................38
Locking and unlocking the doors frominside..........................................................38
Locking and unlocking the doors with thekey..............................................................37
Luggage compartment lid..........................39Reprogramming the unlockingfunction......................................................39
Locks.........................................................37Luggage anchor points........................1794-door and 5-door.....................................180Estate............................................................179
Luggage covers....................................182Stowing the luggage cover - Estatewithout full size spare wheel.................183
MMaintenance.........................................209General information...................................209Technical specifications............................223
296
Index
Manual climate control.........................108Air conditioning............................................109Air distribution control................................108Blower..........................................................108Heating the interior quickly........................108Recirculated air...........................................108Ventilation.....................................................109
Manual seats...........................................121Adjusting the angle of the seatback........122Adjusting the height of the driver’sseat...........................................................122
Adjusting the lumbar support...................122Moving the seats backwards andforwards....................................................121
Manual transmission.............................150Map pockets..........................................130Memory function...................................130Recalling a stored seat position................131Resetting the memory...............................131Setting a memory pre-set.........................130
Message centreSee: Information displays............................84
MirrorsSee: Heated windows and mirrors...........113See: Windows and mirrors..........................71
MP3 connectionSee: Connecting an external device.......276See: Connecting an external device -Vehicles With: Bluetooth.......................276
NNavigation introduction........................283Navigation system commands..........272Navigation system................................284
OOccupant protection..............................29Principle of operation...................................29
Oil checkSee: Engine oil check.................................221
See: Opening and closing the bonnet.....210
OOpening and closing the bonnet........210Closing the bonnet.....................................210Opening the bonnet...................................210
PParking aid..............................................160Principle of operation.................................160
Parking aidSee: Using the parking aid........................160
Parking brake.........................................153Applying the parking brake.......................153Parking on a hill...........................................153Releasing the parking brake.....................153
Parts and accessories..............................7Look for the Ford logo on the followingparts .............................................................8
Now you can be sure that your Ford partsare Ford parts..............................................7
Personalised settings.............................95Help screen, radio, navigation and phoneinformation................................................95
Language......................................................96Navigation information................................95Units of measure..........................................96
Power steering fluid check.................222Topping up..................................................223
Programming the remote control........34Programming a new remote control........34Reprogramming the unlockingfunction......................................................34
297
Index
QQuick start..................................................11Adjusting the steering wheel.......................15Autolamps......................................................16Automatic climate control...........................18Automatic main beam control....................16Automatic transmission..............................20Autowipers.....................................................15Blind spot information system (BLIS).........17Changing the wiper blades ........................15Diesel particulate filter (DPF).......................19Driver alert......................................................21Electric child safety locks.............................14Electric folding mirrors..................................17Electric windows...........................................16Engine idle speed after starting..................19Fuel filler flap...................................................19Information displays......................................17Instrument panel overview - left-handdrive.............................................................11
Instrument panel overview - right-handdrive............................................................12
Keyless entry.................................................14Keyless starting.............................................19Lane departure warning..............................21Manual climate control.................................18Manual transmission....................................20Rear view camera........................................20Reverse mirror dipping.................................17Speed limiter..................................................21Towing the vehicle on four wheels.............21
RRear fog lamps........................................57Rear seats..............................................124Creating a level load floor..........................124Folding the seatbacks down....................124Folding the seatbacks up..........................125
Rear under floor storage......................182Vehicles with a sliding loadspacefloor...........................................................182
Vehicles without a sliding loadspacefloor...........................................................182
Rear view camera.................................162Principle of operation.................................162
Rear window wiper and washers.........51Intermittent wipe...........................................51Reverse gear wipe........................................51Washer............................................................51
Refuelling - E85......................................145Refuelling................................................145Remote control batterySee: Changing the remote controlbattery........................................................34
Remote control programmingSee: Programming the remote control.....34
Removing a headlamp............................61Repairing minor paint damage...........227Road Safety...........................................283Safety information......................................283
Roof racks and load carriers...............184Roof rack......................................................184
Running-in..............................................192Brakes and clutch.......................................192Engine...........................................................192Tyres.............................................................192
SSeat belt height adjustment...................31Seat belt reminder..................................32Deactivating the seat belt reminder..........32
Seat beltsSee: Fastening the seat belts.....................31
Seat memory functionSee: Memory function...............................130
Seats........................................................121Sitting in the correct position................121Sliding loadspace floor..........................180Storage compartment................................181
Snow chainsSee: Using snow chains............................239
Speed controlSee: Cruise control.....................................165
Speed limiter...........................................173Principle of operation.................................173
Stability control.......................................154Principle of operation.................................154
Stability controlSee: Using stability control........................154
Starter switchSee: Ignition switch.....................................133
298
Index
Starting a diesel engine........................137Cold or hot engine......................................137
Starting a petrol engine - E85..............137Starting at low ambient temperatures...................................................................137
Starting a petrol engine........................136Cold or hot engine......................................136Engine idle speed after starting...............136Flooded engine...........................................136
Starting the engine................................133General information....................................133
Start-stop................................................140Principle of operation.................................140
Steering wheel lock...............................135Vehicles with keyless starting...................135Vehicles without keyless starting.............135
Steering wheel.........................................48Storage compartments........................129Sun blinds................................................127SunroofSee: Electric sunroof...................................118
Switching off the engine.......................138Vehicles with a turbocharger....................138
Symbols glossary.......................................7Symbols in this handbook.............................7Symbols on your vehicle................................7
TTechnical specifications.......................245Technical specifications............................245
Telephone commands.........................267Create a phonebook.................................270Main settings...............................................271Phone...........................................................267Phone functions.........................................268
Telephone controls..............................252Remote control..........................................252
Telephone setup...................................250Bond another Bluetooth phone...............251Making a phone an active phone...........250Phonebook.................................................250Phonebook categories.............................250
Telephone..............................................250General information...................................250
TelephoneSee: Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System................................255
See: Using the telephone - VehiclesWithout:Navigation System................................252
Towing a trailer.......................................188Steep gradients..........................................188
Towing points........................................207Installing the towing eye............................207Towing eye location...................................207
Towing the vehicle on fourwheels..................................................207All vehicles...................................................207Vehicles with automatictransmission...........................................208
Towing.....................................................188Transmission..........................................150Trip computer..........................................93Average fuel consumption.........................93Average speed.............................................93Distance to empty........................................93Odometer......................................................93Outside air temperature..............................93Tripmeter.......................................................93Type 1 and 2..................................................94Type 3............................................................94
Type approvals......................................286FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.........286RX-42 - declaration of conformity..........286
Tyre care................................................238Tyre pressure monitoring system......239Checking the tyre pressures...................240Setting the vehicle load.............................240
Tyre pressuresSee: Technical specifications...................240
Tyre repair kit.........................................235Checking the tyre pressure......................237General information...................................235Inflating the tyre..........................................236Using the tyre repair kit.............................235
TyresSee: Wheels and tyres..............................230
UUSB port.................................................132USBSee: Using a USB device...........................277
299
Index
Using ACC..............................................168Automatic deactivation...............................171Changing the set speed............................169Setting a speed...........................................169Setting the vehicle gap..............................170Switching the system off............................171Switching the system on...........................169Temporarily deactivating the system.......171
Using active suspension......................159Selecting a setting......................................159System malfunction...................................159
Using an iPod.........................................279CD Navigation units....................................281SD Navigation units....................................281Sony radio...................................................280
Using a USB device..............................277CD Navigation units...................................278SD Navigation units....................................279Sony radio....................................................277
Using booster cables...........................228To connect the booster cables...............228To start the engine.....................................228
Using cruise control..............................165Cancelling the set speed..........................165Changing the set speed............................165Resuming the set speed...........................166Setting a speed...........................................165Switching cruise control off.......................166Switching cruise control on.......................165
Using driver alert....................................175Resetting the system.................................176Switching the system on and off..............175System display............................................176System warnings........................................175
Using Eco mode....................................142Resetting Eco mode..................................142
Using hill start assist..............................156Activating the system.................................157Deactivating the system............................158
Using lane departure warning..............177Setting the steering wheel vibrationlevel...........................................................178
Setting the system sensitivity...................178Switching the system on and off..............177System warnings........................................178
Using seat belts during pregnancy......32Using snow chains...............................239Vehicles with stability control (ESP)........239
Using stability control............................154Vehicles without stability control (ESP)switch.......................................................155
Vehicles with stability control (ESP)switch.......................................................154
Using start-stop.....................................140To re-start the engine.................................141To stop the engine.....................................140
Using the parking aid............................160Manoeuvring with the parking aid...........160Switching the parking aid on and off.......160
Using the rear view camera.................162Activating the rear view camera..............162Deactivating the rear view camera..........164Using the display.........................................162Vehicles with parking aid...........................164
Using the speed limiter.........................173Intentionally exceeding the speedlimit............................................................173
Setting the speed limit...............................173System warnings........................................174
Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System.............................255Changing the active phone......................256Debonding a bonded phone...................256Making a call...............................................255Muting the microphone............................255Receiving an incoming call.......................255Receiving a second incoming call...........255
Using the telephone - VehiclesWithout:Navigation System.............................252Changing the active phone......................254Debonding a bonded phone...................254Debonding a bonded phone - Sonyradio.........................................................254
Making a call...............................................252Muting the microphone............................254Receiving an incoming call.......................253Receiving a second incoming call...........253
Using voice control...............................257Name tag....................................................258System operation.......................................257
Using winter tyres.................................239
VVehicle battery......................................228Vehicle care...........................................226
300
Index
Vehicle identification number(VIN)......................................................244
Vehicle identification plate...................244Vehicle identification.............................244Vehicle recovery....................................207Ventilated seats.....................................126Raising and lowering the temperatureautomatically...........................................126
Raising and lowering the temperaturemanually...................................................126
VentilationSee: Climate control...................................107
VentsSee: Air vents...............................................107
VINSee: Vehicle identification number(VIN).........................................................244
Voice control..........................................257Principle of operation.................................257
WWarning lamps and indicators..............80ABS warning lamp........................................80Airbag warning lamp....................................80Blind spot monitor indicator........................80Brake system lamp......................................80Coolant temperature warning lamp..........80Direction indicators.......................................81Engine warning lamp....................................81Forward alert indicator.................................81Front fog lamp indicator...............................81Frost warning lamp.......................................81Glow plug indicator.......................................81Headlamp indicator......................................81Ignition warning lamp...................................81Lane departure warning indicator..............81Low fuel level warning lamp.......................82Main beam indicator....................................82Message indicator.......................................82Oil pressure warning lamp..........................82Rear fog lamp indicator...............................82Seat belt reminder.......................................82Shift indicator................................................82Stability control (ESP) warning lamp.........82Start-stop indicator......................................82
Warning triangle.....................................1934-door and 5-door.....................................193Estate and vehicles with tyre repairkit...............................................................193
Washer fluid check...............................223WashersSee: Wipers and washers...........................50
WashingSee: Cleaning the exterior........................226
Wheels and tyres..................................230General information...................................230Technical specifications............................240
Windows and mirrors..............................71Windscreen washers..............................51Windscreen wipers.................................50Intermittent wipe..........................................50
Winter tyresSee: Using winter tyres.............................239
Wipers and washers...............................50
301
Index
302
Feel the difference
(CG3536en)